SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 PART 1 WASHINGTON, D.C. 1963 Preface to Reprint of 1983 For the past ten years there has been a continuing series of plaintive requests for copies of Pettibone's "New England polychaetes." But, alas, the backlog has long since been exhausted. The burgeoning number of marine benthonic surveys, whether of purely ecological research or of more applied environmental impact studies, has demonstrated and emphasized the importance of the role of the polychaetous annelids in marine ecosystems. That there is a continuing call for this publication indicates that Pettibone's painstaking synthesis of the literature of the northeastern U.S. polychaete taxonomy and natural history has not been superseded in twenty years; as a guide through the all-too-often confusing maze of polychaete morphology and nomenclature the monograph is indispensable. We, the users of this v#ork, thank R.B. Manning and K. Fauchald for their efforts in initiating the reprinting of this Bulletin. But, most particularly, we thank Marian H. Pettibone for her fine and enduring work. Meredith L. Jones 1983 MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTOR Marine Polychaete Worms of the New England Region 1. Families Aphroditidae Through Trochochaetidae MARIAN H. PETTIBONE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION WASHINGTON, 1963 Reprinted 1983 Publications of the United States National Museum The scholarly publications of the United State/ National Museum include two series, Proceedings of the United States National Museum and United States National Museum Bulletin. In these series are published original articles and monographs dealing with the collections and work of the Museum and setting forth newly acquired facts in the fields of Anthropology, Biology, Geology, History, and Technology. Copies of each publication are distributed to libraries and scientific organizations and to specialists and others Interested in the different subjects. The Proceedings, begun in 1878, are intended for the publication, in separate form, of shorter papers. These are gathered in volumes, octavo in size, with the publication date of each paper recorded in the table of contents of the volume. In the Bulletin series, the first of which was issued in 1875, appear longer, sep- arate publications consisting of monographs (occasionally in several parts) and volumes in which are collected works on related subjects. Bulletins are either octavo or quarto in size, depending on the needs of the presentation. Since 1902 papers relating to the botanical collections of the Museum have been pubhshed in the Bulletin series under the heading Contributions from the United States National Herbarium, FRANK A. TATI?OR Director, United Slates National Museum UNITED STATES GOVBRNMEMT PRINTING OFFICE, WASHINCTON, 1963 W Contents l-AQE Introduction 3 Superfamily Aphroditoidea 10 Family Aphroditidae 11 Family Polynoidae 15 Family SigalioBidae 45 Family Chrysopetalidae 54 Family Amphinomidae 55 Family Euphrosinidae 62 Family Spintheridae 66 Family Phyllodocidae 68 Family Alciopidae 91 Family Tomopteridae 94 Family Typhloscoleeidae 98 Family Hesionidae 101 Family Pilargiidae 110 Family Syllidae 112 Family Nereidae (?=Lycoridae) 148 Family Paralacydoniidae, new family 184 Family Nephtyidae (=Nephthydidae) ?. . . 186 Family Sphaerodoridae 205 Superfamily Glycerea 209 Family Glyceridae , 209 Family Goniadidae 218 Superfamily Eunicea 229 Family Dorvilleidae {?=sStaurocephalidae and Stauronereidae) . . . 230 Family Eunicidae (?=Leodieidae) 234 Family Onuphidae 243 Family Lumbrineridae (=LumbricoDereidae and Lumbrinereidae) . . 256 Family Arabellidae 268 Family Orbiniidae (=Arieiidae) 276 Family Apistobranchidae 295 Family Paraonidae ( = Levinseniidae) 298 Family Trochochaetidae, new name ( = Disoraidae and Disomididae) . 308 References 317 Index 341 Marine Polychaete Worms of the New England Region Parti Families Aphroditidae Through Trochochaetidae Introduction The polychaetes of the Atlantic coast of New England are still very imperfectly known. Situated as the region is, Arctic and Boreal faunal areas are represented, and a rich polychaete fauna, both in numbers of species and in numbers of individuals, is found there. The fauna has been made known in part chiefly by A. E. Verrill, H. E. Webster, J. E. Benedict, and J. Percy Moore. Some of the original descriptions of the species, however, were sketchy and poorly illustrated, in some cases confined to a footnote of a few lines. Some species were given names without distinguishing them clearly from those previously described. An attempt to rectify these shortcomings was made by Dr. J. Percy Moore in the early 1900's. He prepared a manuscript on "The Poly- chaetous Annelids of the Woods Hole Region" (1,032 manuscript pages, 135 figures), based chiefly on collections made by the U.S. Fish Com- mission. Unfortunately, this manuscript was not published, but it is now deposited in the U.S. National Museum, and was consulted during preparation of the present work. Observations and figures taken from the manuscript are indicated by "Moore (MS.)". Important faunal studies that include the polychaetes are those of F. B. Sumner, et al. (1913) on Woods Hole and vicinity, based on extensive collections by the U.S. Fish Commission (polychaete identifications in part by J. Percy Moore and A. L. TreadweU), and William Procter (1933) on the Mount Desert region (polychaete identifications in part by A. L. TreadweU). Valuable contributions were made by Dr. Olga Hartman after studying the types of poly- chaetous annelids at the Peabody Museum at Yale University (1942b), the U.S. National Museum (1942c), and the American Museum of Natural History (1944a). The last publication includes some of Verrill's previously unpublished plates of drawings made by J. H. Emerton. The present study attempts to give as complete a representation of the New England polychaete fauna as is now possible, to systematize our knowledge of the polychaete species known from this portion of the American coast, and to furnish keys designed to facilitate their 8 4 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 identification. Besides information gathered from the literature, the present work is based on the following: (1) Field studies, including intertidal collecting and shallow dredg- ing, conducted by the writer in the New England region. These studies were confined chiefly to the Woods Hole and Cape Cod region of Massachusetts; the New Hampshire coast and vicinity; and Maine and New Brunswick, especially the Boothbay Harbor region and northern Maine. During parts of five summers in the Cape Cod area, two of them devoted to intensive collecting, my work was aided by members of the Supply Department of the Marine Bio- logical Laboratory of Woods Hole, especially Mr. Milton Gray, who collected a great wealth of material, and by members of the staff and students in the invertebrate and ecology classes at the Laboratory. Sporadic collecting during a couple of years in New Hampshire was aided by members of the staff and students in the summer inverte- brate classes of the University of New Hampshire. Most of the work in Maine was done during the summer of 1955 and was aided by Dr. George M. Moore and members of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service at Boothbay Harbor. This material, as well as that men- tioned below, has in large part been deposited in the U.S. National Museum. (2) Collections from various sources, chiefly from the New Eng- land region: A sizable collection of polychaetes among the fouling organisms from the buoy surveys conducted by the late Dr. Louis W. Hutchins of the Woods Hole Oc?anographie Institution; material gathered by Albatross IH, chiefly from Georges Bank, received from Dr. Roland L. Wigley of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Woods Hole; material from Woods Hole and the Cape Cod area received from Dr. John Rankin, Jr.; collections made in Buzzards Bay by Dr. Howard Sanders and Dr. Nathan Riser; specimens from Nan tucket Sound received from Mr. Thayer Shafer; material collected at the Nar- ragansett Marine Laboratory, Rhode Island, by Dr. Donald Zinn, Mr. Alden P. Stickney, Mr. Louis D. Stringer, and Mr. Harry P. Jeffries; collections made by Mr. Anthony Ganaros of the Maine Department of Sea and Shore Fisheries; specimens from Mr. Robert Hanks and Mr. Louis Taxiarchis of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Boothbay Harbor; material collected in the Chincoteague Bay ar.ea of Maryland by Dr. Samson McDowell, Jr.; collections made at Cape Ann, Massa- chusetts, by Dr. Ralph W. Dexter; specimens from Woods Hole and Puerto Rico from Dr. M. Jean Allen; material from Sapelo Island, Georgia, received from Dr. John M. Teal; miscellaneous material from Dr. Robert Howard, Dr. Emery F. Swan, and Mr. W. L. Klawe; collections from the Canadian Atlantic coast, St. Lawrence estuary and Gasp?, Newfoundland, Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia, and POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART I 5 Bay of Fundy from P. Brunei and others from the Station de Bio- logie Marine, Grande-Rivi?re, E, L. Bousfieid from the National Museum of Canada, from the Nova Scotia Museum of Science, and the Royal Ontario Museum of Science; material from Mr. John L. Taylor, from Seahorse Key, Florida. (3) Collections in the U.S. National Museum. Nearly 3 years were spent at the Museum, working over the material referred to above and examining comparative material. In addition to the valu- able cataloged and type specimens deposited in the Museum, a good deal of unidentified material from various sources was available for study, including some collected by the U.S. Fish Commission vessels Albatross and Fish Hawk off the east coast of North America, chiefly between 1883 and 1921 ; these collections had been only partly worked up by A. E. Verrill, A. L. Treadwell, J. Percy Moore, and others. The polychaete taxonomy has been revised to a limited extent. For each genus, the original reference and type species are given and have been checked, except for those indicated as "not seen" in the list of references. Among the factors causing particular confusion in polychaete taxonomy, as with many other groups, are the continued use of a generic name even though preoccupied, the use of a generic name in a different sense from that indicated by the type species, the type designation of a species not included when the genus was pro- posed, use of a different spelling from the original, and failure to use the name of the oldest synonym. As a result of this first part of the study, 12 new species are described (Pettibone, 1955,1956b, 1957a-c), and a new family, Paralacydoniidae, and a new family name, Trochochaetidae (=Disomidae), are proposed. Part I includes 183 species belonging to 29 families. In order to facilitate identification, keys to the families, genera, and species are given, as well as synopses of the families. All species are figured in part. Most of the illustrations were drawn under the writer's direc- tion, many of them from living material, by Mrs. Marie Litterer. Figures 1 and 2 were drawn by Mr. Lawrence Isham. Some figures were prepared from the writer's sketches and some from the unpub- lished manuscript of J. Percy Moore. An explanatory key to the lettering on the figures is given on page 6. The synonymies listed are by no means complete, but they bring together the important references to additional descriptions and figures and to ecological, embryological, and distributional references and records. The treat- ment otherwise includes a brief description of each species, notes on the biology of most of the species, an indication of the material examined, and the known geographic and bathym?trie limits of each species. 6 XJ.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 This study was aided by grants from the National Science Founda- tion (NSF G-526, G-2012, G-4833) and from the Central University Kesearch Fund of the Graduate School of the University of New Hampshire (CURF-50). The writer acknowledges her appreciation to the National Science Foundation for continued support on the project; to the University of New Hampshire for both support and leave time, and particularly to Dr. George M. Moore, whose interest and help throughout the project have been invaluable; and to the authorities of the U.S. National Museum for allowing her to make use of the facilities of the Institution, and especially to Dr. Fenner A. Chace, Jr., and Dr. Frederick M. Bayer for their help on taxonomic and other problems, to Mrs. Lanelle Peterson for her help in uncover- ing many rare "gems," to Dr. Waldo L. Schmitt for his enthusiastic prodding, and to the librarians for their invaluable aid in helping to obtain necessary and often difficult-to-find literature. It is my hope that the second and concluding part of this study will be completed in the next few years. Explanation of Symbols on Figures The explanation of letter symbols on figures follows. Roman numerals indicate body segments (in Phyllodocidae), areas of proboscis (in Nereidae and Goniadidae), and maxillary jaw pieces (in Eunicea). a C, anal cirrus a K, acfaaetous knob a La, anterior lamella a P, anal or pygidial plate ac, aciculum ac L, acicular lobe ac S, acicular seta ai, aileron or wing on jaw an, antenna br, branchia bu S, buccal segment c G, ohromophUe gland c P, cephalic peak of prostomium ca, capsule car, caruncle cer, ceratophore or base of antenna ch, chevron cph, cirrophore or base of dorsal cirrus cr, crotchet ct, ctenidium or ciliated cushion D, dorsal d C, dorsal cirrus or notocirrus d La, dorsal lamella d T, dorsal tubercle of cirrigerous or non-elytra-bearing segment D t C, dorsal tentacular cirrus el, elytron or scale elph, elytrophore ey, eye de R, denticled rim or margin f An, frontal antenna t Tu, facial tubercle gl, gland h G, hyaline gland int C, interramal cirrus or intercirrus j, jaw 1 An, lateral antenna li, ligule lo, lobe m, mouth m An, median antenna m C, maxillary carriers m Pa, median papilla m R, maxillary ring ma G, macrognath man, mandible max, maxilla mi G, micrognath ne, neuropodium or ventral ramus of parapodium POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 ne C, neuropodial cirrus ne Li, neuropodial ligule ne S, neurosetae no, notopodium or dorsal ramus of parapodium no Li, notopodial ligule no S, notosetae nu E, nuchal epaulette nu F, nuchal fold nu H, nuchal hood nu O, nuchal organ nu T, nuchal tubercle oc An, occipital antenna oc P, ocular peduncle o R, oral ring ov, ovary p La, posterior lamella pa, palp pap, papilla pi, pinnule post L, postsetal lobe or lip post Pap, postsetai papillae or podial fringe pr, prostomium pre L, presetal lobe or lip prob, proboscis prob 0, proboscideal organs ro, rosette organ 8 8, swimming setae sem R, seminal or sperm receptacle or pouch set, setigerous segment or "setiger" set Lo, setigerous lobe Bt, style of dorsal cirrus sty, stylodes of parapodia or parapo- dial fringe Bub F, subpodal flange or ventral pad sub Pap, subpodal lateral papilla or ventral cirrus t C, tentacular cirrus t S, tentacular segment t Pa, tentacular palp to, tooth V, ventral V C, ventral cirrus or neurocirrus V Pap, ventral or stomach papillae or ventral fringe V t C, ventral tentacular cirrus Class Polychaeta 3. Key to the Families of Polychaeta fiom New England: ?phroditidae through Trochochaetidae Body transparent. Exclusively pelagic 2 Body opaque. Not exclusively pelagic 4 Parapodia uniramous; with foliaceous doraal and ventral cirri. Eyes enor- mous or absent ? 3 Parapodia biramoua, each ramus bordered by flattened finlike membranes or pinnules, without external setae; without dorsal and ventral cirri. Prostomium and fused tentacular segment with a pair of small eyes, a pair of diverging, flattened anterior antennae or frontal horns, and a large pair of tentacular cirri (figs. 24, 25) .... Tomopteridae (p. 94) Prostomium small, suboval, with 4-5 antennae, with a pair of enormous spherical eyes with globular lenses. Parapodia well developed with setae numerous, long, capillary (figs. 22, 23} Alciopidae (p. 91) Prostomium conical, without antennae, with prominent nuchal organ, without eyes. Parapodia vestigial with setae lacking or with few short acicular setae (fig. 26) Typhloscolecidac (p. 98) With projecting parapodial setal lobes supported by internal acicula . . 6 Without projecting parapodial setal lobes, without internal acicula; para- podia biramoua, with conical or filiform postsetal notopodial lobejs, with or without neuropodial postsetal lobes; setae simple. Prostomium sub- conical, with pair of nuchal organs. Without tentacular cirri or tentacu- lar palps. Branchiae dorsal to notopodia, simple, straplike or wide 8 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 foliaceous. Proboscis saclike, unarmed (bottom-deposit feeders). Live in mud or sand with tubes of mucus plus sand or mud (figs. 79-81). Paraonidae (p. 298) 5. Proboscis eversible, unarmed, saclike, used in burrowing and feeding (bot- tom-deposit feeders). Body divided into 2-3 regions witli parapodia differing markedly 6 Proboscis variable, not saclike. Body with parapodia similar along body, at least not divided into distinct regions (except sometimes in sexual epitokoua stages and in Goniadidae, which has anterior uniramous and posterior biramous regions) 8 6. Body divided into 3 regions. Prostomium more or less fused with buccal segment, with pair of long, longitudinally-grooved, spionif?rm tentacular palps (deciduous, may be missing) 7 Body divided into (1) anterior thoracic region with parapodia lateral and (2) posterior abdominal region with both neuropodia and notopodia directed dorsally, with ligulate postsetal lobes. Branchiae dorsal to notopodia, simple (rarely branched), straplike (postsetal lobes and bran- chiae give straggly, slashed aspect to abdominal region). Parapodia biramous. Prostomium subconical, subglobular or spatula te; without appendages; with pair of inconspicuous nuchal organs; without tentacu- lar palps (figs. 74-76) Orbiniidae (p. 276) 7. Prostomium and fused buccal segment subconical to suboval, with pair of nuchai folds. Parapodia subbiramous, with notopodia cylindrical, with internal acicula only, without notosetae (figs. 77, 78). Apistobranchidae (p. 295) Prostomium elongate-oval, wedged between first 2 setigers. Parapodia biramous, with notosetae (except in middle uniramous region) (figs. 82, 83). Trochochaetidae, New Name (p. 308) 8. Without dorsal scales or elytra II With dorsal scales or elytra on certain segments, more or less covering dorsum (elytra may be hidden by dorsal feltage of capillary notosetae in some Aphroditidae) . . superfamily APHRODITOIDEA 9 9. With filiform dorsal cirri on non-elytra-bearing segments 10 Without dorsal cirri (except sometimes on setiger 3) (figs. 10, 11). Sigalionidae (p. 45) 10. First or tentacular segment with numerous setae. Facial tubercle well developed. Dorsal feltage more or less concealing elytra (figs. 1, 2). Aphroditidae (p. 11) Tentacular segment with setae few or lacking. Facial tubercle poorly de- velopedor lacking. Dorsal feltage lacking (figs. 3-9) . . Polynoidae (p. 15) 11. Dorsal surface convex, bristly, formed by elongated transverse notopodial or dorsal setigerous lobes nearly covering dorsum, with numerous spinelike notosetae in transverse rows 12 Dorsal surface otherwise 13 12. Neuropodia not sharply set off from notopodia, with numerous simple neurosetae (fig. 14) Euphrosinidae (p. 62) Neuropodia cylindrical, sharply set off from notopodia, with 1 or few com- pound hooked neurosetae. Associated with sponges (fig. 15). Spintheridae (p. 66) 13. Body without spherical capsules. Prostomium distinct. Segmentation distinct 14 POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 9 Body with 2 or more rows of large spherical capsules, segmentally arranged. Prostomium and tentacular segment indistinct. Segmentation indistinct except as marked by parapodia. Parapodia uniraraous. Body covered with papulae (fig. 52) Sphaerodoridae (p. 205) 14. With dorsal cirri posterior to lateral fanlike tufts of notosetae 15 Dorsal cirri lacking or otherwise 16 15. Notosetae in lateral tufts curving dorsally and forming fan-shaped groups or transverse rows. Neurosetae compound. Without branchiae (fig. 12). Chrysopetalidae (p. 54) Notosetae extending laterally. Neurosetae simple. With paired branched branchiae posterior to bases of notopodia on certain number of seg- ments (fig. 13) Amphinomidae (p. 55) 16. Dorsal and ventral cirri, if present, not leaflike or globular 17 Dorsal and ventral cirri flattened, leaflike or more or less globular. Pro- stomium with 4-5 antennae. Tentacular cirri 2-4 pairs. Parapodia uniramous (exceptionally subbiramous) ; setae compound (figs. 16-21). Phyllodocidae (p. 68) 17. Prostomium conical, annulated, ending distally in 4 minute antennae. Peri- stomium fused with prostomium, without tentacular cirri. Large powerful proboscis. Burrow in sand or mud, . superfamily GLYCBRBA (p. 209) . 18 Prostomium otherwise 19 18. Body with parapodia similar, either all uniramous or all biramous. Dorsal cirri smal!, globular; ventral cirri larger, conical. Proboscis with 4 sub- equal jaws or macrognaths (figs. 53-55) Glyceridac (p. 209) Body divided into 2-3 regions: (1) anterior region with uniramous para- podia; (2) transitional region in which notopodia develop gradually (may be lacking); (3) posterior biramous region with rami well separated. Both dorsal and ventral cirri conical to ligulate. Proboscis with pair of dentate macrognaths and variable number of micrognaths (figs, 56-69). Goniadidac (p. 218) 19. Body subrectangular in cross-section. Biramous parapodia with rami well separated and with long cilia along interramal border; notosetae and neurosetae arranged in fan-shaped bundles, with more or less developed presetal and postsetal flattened plates or lamellae. Prostomium flattened, shield shaped, subconieal to subrectangular, with 4 small antennae. Burrow in sand or mud 20 Body, parapodia, and prostomium otherwise 21 20. Tentacular or buccal .segment with notosetae and neurosetae, with pair of small ventral tentacular cirri. Neurosetae simple (figs. 47-51). Nephtyidae (p. 186) Tentacular or buccal segment achaetous, without tentacular cirri. Neuro- setae compound (fig. 46) . . . Paralacydoniidae, new family (p. 184) 21. With 1-2 achaetous and apodous tentacular or buccal segments, without tentacular cirri (or with only a single short laterodorsal pair). With elaborate dark chitinous jaw apparatus consisting of pair of ventral mandibles and more dorsal maxillae consisting of few to numerous paired pieces . . superfamily E?NICEA (p. 229) 22 With 1-8 pairs lateral tentacular cirri. Jaws absent or otherwise ... 26 22. Prostomium simple conical or suboval, without antennae or distinct palps. Parapodia without dorsal or ventral cirri. First 2 segments achaetous and apodous, without tentacular cirri. Body smooth, elongate, cylindri- cal, resembling an earthworm. Burrowing, carnivorous 23 10 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Prostomium suboval, with 1-7 antennae, 2 palps (latter may be rather indistinctly separated from prostomium). Parapodia with subulate to cirriform dorsal and ventral cirri (latter may be thickened, padlike in more posterior segments). Body otherwise 24 23. Neurosetae consisting of: (1) Lirabate setae with fine tips and (2) hooded hooks or crotchets (figs. 67-70) Lumbrineridae (p. 256) Neurosetae consisting of limbate setae and with or without projecting acicular setae; without hooded hooks or crotchets (figs. 71-73). Arabellidae (p. 268) 24. First 2 segments apodous and achaetous 25 First apparent segment apodous and achaetous. Prostomial antennae 7 (5 long occipital, 2 short frontal) ; paired ventral palps short, globular. Tube dwelling (figs. 64-66) Onuphidae (p. 243) 25. Prostomium with pair of articulated antennae and pair of long curved ventral palps (or both short, subequal in Ophryotrocha). Crawling or burrow- ing (figs. 60, 61) Dorvilleidae (p. 230) Prostomium with 1-5 occipital antennae and a pair of short globular ventral palps more or less fused to prostomium. Tube dwelling (figs. 62, 63). Eunicidae (p. 234) 26. Neurosetae compound (some may have blades secondarily fused to shafts in some Syllidae) 27 Neurosetae and notosetae simple, not compound (notosetae may be stout, hooked). Tentacular segment apodous and achaetous, more or less fused with prostomium, usually with 2 pairs of small tentacular cirri (fig. 30). Pilargiidae (p. 110) 27. Parapodia biramous or subbiramous; notopodia at least represented by internal acicula 28 Parapodia uniramous (noiay be biramous in sexual epitokes). Tentacular segment apodous and achaetous, with 1-2 pairs of tentacular cirri. Pro- stomium suboval with 3 antennae, 2 palps (latter may be reduced and fused) (figs. 31-40) Syllidae (p. 112) 28. Parapodia with varying degrees of development of extra tonguelike lobes or ligules (may be lacking, as in Lycastopsis). Prostomium suboval to subpyriform, with 2 frontal antennae and 2 biarticulate palps. Proboscis with pair of distal dentate hooked jaws. With single apparent tentacular segment with 3-4 pairs tentacular cirri. Notosetae compound (may be lacking, as in Lycastopsis) (figs. 41-45) Nereidae (p. 148) Parapodia without ligules (may have extra lobes, as in Nereimyra), Pro- stomium suboval to subquadrangular, with 2-3 antennae, 2 palps (may be biarticulate). Proboscis without jaws or jaws otherwise. With 1-4 achaetous tentacular segments more or less distinct, with 2-8 pairs ten- tacular cirri. Notosetae simple or lacking (figs. 27-29). Hesionidae (p. 101) Superfamily Aphroditoidea Members of this superfamily possess paired dorsal scales or elytra borne on cylindrical stumps, the elytrophores, on a certain number of segments (fig. 3,a-6; in Aphroditidae, elytra may be hidden imder dorsal feltage consisting of modified notosetae). Prostomium dis- tinct, bearing 1 to 3 dorsal antennae, a pair of elongated conical ventral palps, and usually 2 pairs of eyes (0-2 pairs). First or tentacular POLTCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 11 segment with 2 pairs of tentacular cirri, with or without setae. Para- podia biramous, with or without filiform dorsal cirri on segments bearing no elytra, with short subulate ventral cirri. Pygidium usu- ally with a pair of anal cirri. Eversible muscular pharynx, with soft sensory papillae around opening and usually with 2 pairs of chiti- noxis jaws (rudimentary in Aphroditidae, fig. 3c). Carnivorous. Included are the families Aphroditidae, Polynoidae, and Sigalioni- dae (see the key to the families, p. 8), sometimes considered sub- families of the family Aphroditidae. Family Aphroditidae Body relatively short and broad, oval or spindle shaped. Seg- ments few in number (less than 60). Elytra 15 to 20 pairs, large, overlapping. With dorsal cirri on segments without elytra. Noto- setae consisting of capillary setae which may extend dorsally, forming a f el tage (fei tage composed of the fine capillary setae combined with mucus, mud, sand, and debris) and large, brownish protective spines Ventral surface and parapodia covered with globular papillae. First or tentacular segment with numerous setae. Prostomium spherical, usually with median antenna only. Facial tubercle well developed. Proboscis large and powerful, lacking jaws or jaws rudimentary. Usually found in mud. Key to the New England Genera of Aphroditidae 1. Dorsal feltage loose, more or less developed, usually not covering elytra com- pletely (may be absent). Large dark notosetae with tips barbed (harpoon shaped, fig. Ic). Neurosetae with unilateral fringe and a basal spur (fig. Id). Prostomium with ocular peduncles, with or without pigment or eyes (fig. la) Laetmonice Dorsal feltage a thick tangled matting completely covering the elytra (fig, 2,a-6). Large dark notosetae without barbed tips. Neurosetae pointed to slightly hooked, without unilateral fringe or basal spur. Prostomium without ocular peduncles; eyes, when present, sessile (fig. 2c) . Aphrodita Genus Laetmonice Kinberg, 1855 Type (monotypy) : Laetmonice filicomis Kinberg, 1855. Contains only one New England species. Laetmonice fiUcornia Kinberg, 1855 FlQOKE 1 Laeimatonice armata Verrill, 1879, p. 168; 1881, pp. 297, 303, 307, 311, 319, 320, pi. 6, fig. 6, a, 5.?Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 708.?Miner, 1950, p. 308, pi. 100. 569-457?63 2 12 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Laetmonice filicornis Moore, 1903a, p. 420; 1909a, p. 137.?Hartman, 1942a, p. 90.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 11, fig. 2ii.?Eliason, 1962, p. 213.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 11; 1951, p. 7.?Miner, 1950, p. 308, pi. 101. Laetmatonice filicornis Fauvel, 1923, p. 36, fig. 12, a-f,?St0p-Bowita, 1948a, p. 8. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 90 mm., width including setae up to 45 mm., segments 33-42. Dorsum more or less covered with grayish felt composed of feltage notosetae, mucus and mud; the sides are flanked by the large iridescent brownish setae. Elytra usually 15 (14-18) pairs, smooth, deeply notched on the outer attached borders. Median antenna, tentacular cirri, and dorsal cirri long, filifonn, in- FlGURE 1.?Aphroditidae, Laetmonice filicornis: a, dorsal view prostomlum and tentacular segment; b, parapodium of cirrigerous segment; c, tip of notoseta showing barbs; d, neuroseta showing basal spur and unilateral fringe. POLTCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 13 flated at the tips. Prostomium with nonpigmented ocular peduncles. Neuropodium long, slender, with few stout brownish neurosetae arranged in three rows. Notosetae of cirrigerous segments composed of several divergent clusters of light-colored transparent capillary setae, some rather thick basally. On elytragerous segments, notosetae composed of: (1) Fan-shaped upper group of light yellow, slender setae with capillary tips, the f el tage setae; (2) fan-shaped lower group of stout, dark-brownish, spinelike protective setae with pointed harpoon-shaped tips with several recurved barbs (fig. Ic); (3) groups of fine capillary setae arranged basally and ventrally to the stout protective setae. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud and fine sand, often at con- siderable depths. Restricted mostly to the open sea. Taken from the stomach of the tile fish (Moore, MS.). MATERIAL EXAMINED.-?^Numerous specimens from off Newfound- land and south of Anticosti Island in Gulf of St. Lawrence to off North Carolina, in 19 to 2,620 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Davis Strait and west Greenland, Iceland, North Atlantic to West Indies, Gulf of Mexico, AustraUa. In 19 to 2,620 fathoms. Genus Aphrodita Linn?, 1758 Type (designated by Malmgren, 1867, p. 3); Aphrodita aculeata Linn?, 1758. Contains only one New England species. Aphrodita hastata Moore, 1905 FIGURE 2 Aphrodite aculeata Verrill, 1881, pp. 288, 290, 297, 300, 303, 306, 307, 311, 323, pi. 3, fig. 1.?Not A. aculeata Linn?, 1758. Aphrodita aculeata Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 699; 1887, p. 708.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 12, fig. 2c.?Not A. aculeata Linn?, 1758. Aphrodita hastata Moore, 1905, p. 294, figs. 1-4.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 619.?Procter, 1933, p. 136.?Pratt, 1951, p. 327, fig. 488. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 150 mm. (up to 230 mm,, Procter, 1933), width including setae up to 75 mm., segments 40-41. Dorsum completely covered with a grayish feltage composed of a tangled mass of capillary notosetae and mud. Elytra 15 pairs, large, smooth. Prostomium with short median antenna and pair of sessile pigmented areas. Neuropodium stout, with light to dark amber-colored neuro- setae arranged in three rows; neurosetae stout basally, tapering gradually to sharp tips (may be blunt due to wear). Notopodium bearing 3 kinds of setae: (1) Lateral group of highly iridescent capillary setae, yellowish (in younger individuals) to red- dish bronzy (in larger individuals ; in A. aeuleaia, this group is bronzy 14 U.S. NATIONAL MUSETTM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 2.?Aphroditidae, A-phrodita hasfata; a, dorsal view anterior end; b, dorsal view posterior end; c, dorsal view prostomium and tentacular segment; d, parapodium of cirrigerous segment. baaally and brilliant bluish green distally). (2) An upper and lower tuft of large, dark amber-colored protective notosetae; tbey extend dorsomedially, perforating the dorsal feltage, nearly touching medially and especially conspicuous in the posterior fourth; they are stout basally, tapering gradually to slender, flexible hooked tips (may be broken off; in A. acvleata, these protective spines are thicker, darker, much shorter, acute and rigid, projecting stifHy along the lateral part of the body and leaving the greater pa,rt of the dorsum free of these heavy spines). (3) Groups of fine, capillary, iridescent, yel- lowish feltage setae in 2 main groups on the cirrigerous segments, POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART I 15 1 above and 1 below the upper tuft of protective notosetae, and 1 large group between the 2 groups of protective setae on the elytrag- erous segments; the feltage setae extend dorsally forming a tangled continuous mat covering the elytra and penetrated by the protective setae. BIOLOGY. ?Popularly known as the sea mouse. A dredged form, sometimes washed up on the beach after a storm. Found on bot- toms of mud and on mixed bottoms containing much mud ; sometimes found in lobster pots. Specimens taken from the stomach of haddock (off Chatham, Massachusetts, July 6, 1956, E. Clark, collector; and Georges Bank, February 3, 1955, R. Wigley), from the stomach of a cod, Gadus callarias (Miscou Bank, Gulf of St. Lawrence, May 27, 1953). Adults filled with mature eggs and sperm in August (Gulf of Maine, Procter, 1933). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Gulf of St. Lawrence, Grand Banks off Newfoundland to off mouth of Chesapeake Bay, in 12 to 1,106 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Gulf of St. Lawrence to Chesapeake Bay. In 2 to 1,106 fathoms. Family Polynoidae Body relatively short or long and vermiform. Elytra not con- cealed under feltlike setae. With dorsal cirri on segments without elytra. Pygidium with a pair of anal cirri. First or tentacular seg- ment with setae few or lacking. Prostomium bilobed, usually 2 pairs of eyes, 3 antennae, a pair of palps. Facial tubercle poorly developed. Ventral surface without numerous globular papillae. Proboscis large, powerful, distally with 2 pairs of amber-colored interlocking jaws and a circle of papillae (fig. 3c). Characteristically crawling forms. May live commensaUy with other animals. Key to the New England Genera of Polynoidae 1. Lateral antennae inserted terminally on anterior prolongations of the pro- stomium, without distinct ceratophores (fig. 3&). Ely tral pairs 12-13,17-20, or numerous 2 Lateral antennae inserted ventral to median antenna, with ceratophores more or less distinct (fig. 7a). Elytral pairs 15-16 6 2. With notosetae; notosetae finer than neurosetae 3 Without notosetae 4 3. Segments few (26); elytral pairs 12 Lepidonotus (p. 16) Segments numerous (more than 60) ; elytral pairs numerous (more than 23). Lepidametria (p, 19) 4. Segments 36-39; elytral pairs 17-20. Notopodia represented by a fingerlilie lobe with an embedded aciculum (fig. 4g). Nonpelagic. Alentiana (p. 20) Segments 26-27; elytral pairs 12-13. Notopodia lacking entirely. Pelagic. Drieschia (p. 22) 16 Cr.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 5. At least some of the notosetae with slender capillary tips or notosetae more slender than neurosetae 6 Notosetae stouter than neurosetae, with well rnarked spinous rows and smooth blunt to pointed tips (fig. 7c) 9 6. Segments more than 45. Elytra on anterior part of body only, leaving posterior part uncovered Enipo (p. 22) Segments about 40, Elytra cover dorsum 7 7. Neurosetae with slender sharp tips, not hooked (fig. 4/). . Hartmania (p. 25) At least some of neurosetae with hooked tips 8 8. Neurosetae of 2 forms, some with slender sharp tips and some with bifid tips (fig. 6,j-k) Arcteobia (p. 27) Neurosetae with entire tips (fig, 5,c-d) Gattyana {p.28) 6, Neurosetae long, slender, at least some end in capillary tips. Antino?lla (p. 30) Neurosetae stouter, with tips straight or slightly hooked, not capillary. . 10 10. Neurosetae with hairs on distal tip (fig. ?,o-d). . . . Austrolaenilla (p. 32) Neurosetae without hairs 11 11, Upper neurosetae with slender forked tips (fig, 46). . . . Eucranta (p. 33) Neurosetae with tips bare, hooked (subgenus Euno?, fig. 9c), with sub- terminal secondary tooth (subgenus Harmoiko?, fig. 7d} or with secondary tooth present, rudimentary or absent (subgenus Lagisca). Hannotho? (p. 34) Genus Lepidonotus Leach, 1816; emend. Malmgren, 186S Type (designated by Malmgren, 1867, p. 4) : Lepidonotus squamatus (Linn?, 1758). Both species represented have the body short, linear, of nearly uniform width, with 26 setigerous segments. Elytra 12 pairs, covering the dorsum; elytral surface studded with chitinous tubprcles and lateral fringes of papillae (fig. 3,a,d,e). Antennae, tentacular and dorsal cirri with subterminal enlargements and dark bands on the enlarged parts. Notosetae spiny, finer and shorter than the neuro- setae. Neurosetae stout, dark amber colored, with several rows of spines and smooth hooked tips (without secondary tooth). Key to the New England Species of Lepidonotus 1. Elytral tubercles variable in size?larger and smaller, crowded, conical to low mounds (fig. 3d). Posterior pair of elytra notched medially (fig. 3o). Upper row notosetae shorter, ending in blunt tips, rest end in capillary tips. L. equamatiis Elytral tubercles tiny, widely spaced (fig, 3e). Posterior pair of elytra nearly straight medially, not notched. All the notosetae end in capillary tips. L. sublevia Lepidonotus aquamatiis (Linn^, 175B) FIG ?BE 3,a-d Lepidonotus squamaius Verrill, 1881, pp. 288, 290, 291, 293, 294, 296, 300, 303, 306, 307, 313, 317, 321, 323, pi. 4, fig. 1, pi. 6, fig. 4.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 699; 1887, p. 708.?Moore, 1909a, p. 136.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 17 1913, p. 618.?Kindle, 1917, p. ISO.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 45, fig. 16,/-;.-Not Treadwell, in Cowles, 1930, p. 341 ( = L. sabieD?s).?Procter, 1933, p. 136.? Annenkova, 1937, p. 145; 1938, p. 129.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 14, fig. 4o.? Miner, 1950, p. 303, pi. 99.?Pratt, 1951, p. 327, fig. 449.?Wesenberg- Lund, 1951, p. 19; 1958, p. 26.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1954, p. 455,? Newell, 1954, p. 333.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 126, fig. 20.?Costello, et al., 1957, p. 81.?Stickney, 1959, p. 16.?Clark, 1960, p. 10.?Eliason, 1962, p. 216. Lepidonotus squamatus var. angustus Verrill, 1881, p. 300. Lepidonotus caelorus Pettibone, 1953, p. 15, pis. 1, 2. DESCRIPTION.-Length up to 50 mm., width up to 15 mm. Color: elytra exceedingly variable in coloration, mottled brownish or grayish, or uniformly tan with amber-colored, reddish, or greemsh?*tubercles, with or without a row of bilateral darker spots. BIOLOGY.?A slow moving polynoid that clings close to rough sur- faces of stones, found under stones, hiding in cracks and crevices, in the interstices between mussels (as MytUus), tunicates, barnacles, cavities of sponges, holdfasts of algae (as Laminaria), among cal- careous encrusting algae, hydroids (as Tubularia, Pennaria). Found on piles and timbers of wharves, floats, bridges, buoys, etc. One of the most abundant polychaetes in the oc?anographie fouling studies from the New England region. May be found in brackish waters (Wesenberg-Lund, 1958). According to Newell (1954), it is some- times found in lugworm burrows. It is dredged in great numbers on variable mixtures of rocks, gravel, mud, with shells, bryozoan nodules, tunicates (as sandy Amaroecium), sand dollars, oysters, algae. It is rarely found in mud. When disturbed, it rolls up like a piU bug, de- pending on the tough dorsal scales for protection. It is tough and sturdy, not fragmenting easily or losing its scales readily as do some of the polynoids. In the Woods Hole region, Massachusetts, the breeding season ex- tends from the last two weeks of April through May (Mead, 1897, 1898; Bumpus, 1898a-c). In the Boothbay Harbor region, Maine, specimens were massed with sex products in June (June 24, 1955). Males gave off clouds of white sperm in AprU (Sea Point, Maine, April 3, 1954; Newcastle, New Hampshire, April 7, 1954). Males whitish, viewed ventrally; females, when filled with eggs, dark greenish drab. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Gulf of St. Lawrence, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia to Long Island Sound, intertidal to 134 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?One of the most abundant and generally distrib- uted polynoid species in the North Atlantic and North Pacific, but not an Arctic form. Iceland, Faroes, Norway to France; Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence to New Jersey (Virginia?) ; Alaska to Mexico, Japan. In low water to 1,400 fathoms. 18 tr.S. NATIONAL MUSETJM BULLETIN 227 Lepidonotus sublevis Verrill, 1873a FianBH 3e Lepidonotus sublevis VerriU and Smith, 1874, pp. 26, 38, 103, 116, 128, 287, pi. 10, fig. 42.?Verrill, 1881, p. 300, pi. 4, fig, 2, pi. 6, fig. 3.~Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 618.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 22, figs, 7-12; 1945, p. 10; 1951, p. 17.?Hedgpeth, 1950, p. 75.--Behre, 1950, p. 11.?Pratt, 1951, p. 328. Lepidonotus variabilis Treadwell, in Cowles, 1930, p. 341.?Not L. variabilis Webster, 1879. Lepidonotus squamatus Treadwell, in Cowles, 1930, p. 341.?Not L. squamatus (Linn?, 1758). DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 34 mm., width up to 10 mm. Elytral surface with scattered, widely spaced, conical microtubercles of nearly uniform size, appearing nearly smooth compared with L. squamatus. Color: elytra mottled with grayish, greenish, or reddish brown. BIOLOGY.?The species appears to be rather rare, compared with L. squamatus, due in part perhaps to its commensalistic habits where it escapes notice. It is found living commensally in snail shells oc- cupied by hermit crabs, as Pagurus pollicaris Say, the polynoids oc- cupying the columella as well as the whorls of the shells (found by breakmg the shells). In the Gulf of Mexico, it was found in old shells and on the lower surface of the sea pansy, Benilla mullen Kolliker (Hedgpeth, 1950). It is found mtertidally among oyster clumps and under stones. It is dredged on various types of bottoms, especially shelly. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts (dredged in the hole, Woods Hole, in gastropod shells with hermit crabs, Pagurus pollicaris Say; Muskeget Channel, Mutton Shoal Buoy, 7-20 fathoms; Nobska, Woods Hole; Nantucket Sound, 10 fathoms), Rhode Island (Sakonnet, in shells of moon-snaU and whelk; Greenwich Bay, summers 1951-52, A. D. Stickney), Delaware (Delaware Bay, 3 fathoms, with Pagurus pollicaris), Maryland (Chesapeake Bay, Fish Hawk Stations 8826, 8898, 8918, 8975, m 7.1 to 25.4 fathoms; Hardy's Hole, Public Land- ing, Rattlesnake Island, Rum Harbor on Assateague Island, all in Chincoteague Bay, S. McDoweU), Vh-ginia (near Robins Marsh, Chincoteague Bay), North Carolina (Beaufort, with Pagurus polli- caris, A. S. Pearse, 1946), South Carolina (Kiawah River, Mackays Creek near Chechersee River, Fish Hawk, 1891), Georgia (Sapelo Island), Florida (Seahorse Key, J. Taylor). DISTRIBUTION.?A more southern species than L. squamatus, rang- ing from Massachusetts (Woods Hole region) south to Florida and in the Gulf of Mexico. Low water to 55 fathoms. POLYCHAETE WOBMS, PART 1 19 FIGURE 3.?Polynoidae, a-d, Lcpidonotui tguamatus: a, dorsal view; b, dorsal view pro- siomium and first 2 segments, elytra removed; c, lateral view distal tip of extended proboscis; d, sixth elytron, e, Lepidonotus svilevis, fifth elytron. Genus Lepidametria Webster, 1879 Type (monotypy) : Lepidametria commensalis Webster, 1879. Contains only one New England species. Lepidametria commensalis Webster, 1879 FiouHB 4?; Lepidametria commensalis Webster, 1879, p. 210, pi. 3, figs. 23-31,?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 701.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 618.? Hartman, 1945, p. 10; 1951, p. 17.?Miner, 1950, p. 304, pi. 99. Lepidasihenia commensalis Hartman, 1959a, p. 85. 20 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 100 mm., width including setae up to 9 mm., segments up to 80. Body elongated, vermiform, greatly flat- tened dorsoventrally. Elytra numerous pairs (30-50), continuing to near posterior end, oval, smooth, lacking tubercles and fringes of papillae, overlapping somewhat except medially where there may be a middorsal strip uncovered. The arrangement of the elytra in the posterior region is irregular, i.e., not always symmetrically paired, and as many as 7 elytra in a row. The elytra of young specimens have a peculiar conical raised area just medial to the elytrophores. Notosetae few, delicate, capillary. Neurosetae stout, bidentate, amber colored, the upper 1 or 2 stouter, darker and pointed. Color: body darkly pigmented reddish purple to dark gray or black; dorsal cirri with a dark subterminal band; elytra with small blotches of gray to black pigment with a lighter spot near the elytrophore. BioLOGY.^?Active crawler, usually confined to the intertidal region, living commensally with other polychaetes, mostly terebellids. Found on flats of muddy sand and coarse gravel with mud, in the muddy tubes of the terebellid Amphitrite omata Verrill (Massachu- setts, Connecticut, New Jersey, Virginia, North Carolina), with the onuphid Diopatra cuprea (Bosc) (Beaufort, North Carolina, A. S. Pearse), with terebellid worms including Thelejms setosus (Quatrefages) (Florida, Hartman, 1951). Found among oysters (South Carolina). Shows some of the adaptations characteristic of polynoid tube- dwelling commensals, such as melanistic pigmentation, smooth elytra, extra heavy upper neurosetae which aid in crawling in the tube. Smaller specimens found in the tubes of Amphitrite ornata (some 45 segments, 23 pairs of elytra, Barnstable, August 23,1954, and Duxbury, September 1, 1952). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Massachusetts (Annisquam River, Cape Ann, Duxbury, Barnstable, Wellfleet, Woods Hole region), Virginia (Yorlc River), North Carolina (Beaufort), South Carolina, Georgia (Sapelo Sound, 6-13 fathoms), and Florida, in low water. DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Cape Ann) to Florida and Gulf of Mexico (Florida, Louisiana, Texas). Low water to 13 fathoms. Genus Alentiana Hartman, 1942b Type (original designation): Alentiaria aurantiaca (Verrill, 1885a). Contains only one New England species. Alentiana aurantiaca (Verrill, 1885a) FIGURE 4:,g-j Polyno? aurantiaca Verrai, 1885a, p. 525, pi. 40, fig. 173; 1885b, p. 425. Alentiana aurantiaca Hartman, 1942b, p. 20, figs. 1-6. POLTCHAETB WORMS, PART 1 21 FIGURE 4.?Polynoidae, a-b, Eucranta cillosa: a, elytron; b, tip of neuroseta. c, Austro- laenilla lanelleae, tip of neuroseta. d. Austrolaenilla mollis, tip of neuroseta. e-f. Hart- mania moorei: e, notoseta;/, neuroseta. g-j, Alentiana aurantiaca (after Hartman, 1942b): g, twelfth parapodium, anterior view; k, subacicular neuroseta; i, supra-acicular neuroseta; }, tip of same, enlarged, k, Lipidametria commensalis, middle riglit parapodium, anterior view. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 50 mm., width including setae up to 18 mm,, segments 36-39. Body broad, depressed, tapering posteri- orly, the last few segments very small. Elytra 17-20 pairs, large, rcniform, overlapping, covering the dorsum, becoming gradually smaller posteriorly, thin, soft, translucent, smooth, lacking tubercles 22 U>8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 and fringes of papillae. Prostomium with 4 large eyes. Notopodia reduced to digitif orm lobes, lacking setae (with an embedded aciculum). Neuropodia stout, provided with pale yellow neurosetae of two kinds : Upper more slender ones with barbs on one side, and few (1-2) lower stout ones, smooth and pointed. Color, in life: bright orange red. BIOLOGY.?Deep water species living as a commensal among the tentacles of the large anemone Bolocera tuediae Gosse. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Georges Bank, off Martha's Vineyard, south of Long Island, and off Delaware Bay, in 190 to 640 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Off Massachusetts to off Delaware. In 190 to 640 fathoms. Genus Drieschia Michaelsen, 1892 Plotolepis Chamberlin, 1919; type (monotypy): P. nans Chamberlin, 1919. Type (monotypy): Drieschia pel?gica Michaelsen, 1892. Contains only one New England species. Drieschia peUucida Moore, 1903b FlGUBE 5,h~j Drieschia pellucida Moore, 1903b, p. 794, pi. 55, figa. 1-12,?Hartman, 1956, pp. 249, 265, 271. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 14 mm., width including setae up to 6 mm., segments 26. Body thin walled, colorless and transparent. Parapodia with notopodia lacking. Neuropodia elongated, prominent, with colorless neurosetae of 2 kinds: Upper elongated slender ones with capillary tips, few (3 or so) lower ones short and stout. Cirro- phores of dorsal cirri elongate, some longer than the parapodia. Elytra 12 pairs (possibly 13), smooth, thin, inflated when living. BIOLOGY.?Pelagic, foimd in surface tow net (single type specimen from southeast No Mans Land, Massachusetts) and in the deep waters of the Gulf Stream (off Bermuda; single type specimen of D. atl?ntica Treadwell; see Hartman, 1956). DISTRIBUTION.?Off Massachusetts, off Bermuda, part of the Gulf Stream fauna. Surface waters to 1,000 fathoms. Genus Enipo Malmgren, 186S; sensu Levinsen, 1882 Nemidia Malmgren, 1865,p.84;type (monotypy): Nemidiatorelli Malmgren, 1865. Type (monotypy): Enipo kinhergi Malmgren, 1865. POLTCHAETE WORMS, PABT 1 23 FIGURE 5.?Polynoidae, a, Gattyana nutti, elytron, b-d, Gattyana cirrosa: b, elytron; c, upper neuroseta; d, lower neuroseta. e-n, Gattyana amondseni: e, elytron; /, upper neuroseta; g, lower neuroseta. h-j, Drieschia pellucida (after Moore, 1903 b): h, tenth parapodium, posterior view, setae omitted; ?, upper slender neuroseta; j, lower ?tout neurosetae from tenth parapodium. Key to the New England and Gulf of St. Lawrence Species of Enipo 1. Notosetae slender to moderately stout, tapering to blunt tips (not capillary) ; neurosetae stouter, with bare, slightly hooked tips (fig. 6,a-c) E. gracilis Notosetae taper to fine capillary tips 2 2. Neurosetae of two kinds: with slender sharp tips and with entire hooked tips (flg. 6,e,/). With two middorsal nodules per segment. Elytra very small (fig. 6ci) E. canadensis Neurosetae taper to slender sharp tips (not hooked, fig. 6,?, t). Without mid- dorsal nodules. Elytra larger E. torelli 24 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Enipo gracilis Verrill, 1874a FIGURE 6,a-c Enipo gracilis Verril!, 1874a, pp. 407, 411, pi. 6, fig. 4.?Pettibone, 1953, p. 22 pi. 7; 1954, p. 225. Polynoe gasp?ensis Molntosh, 1874, p. 267, pi. 9, figs. 14, 15, pi. 10 figs 12 13 ? Whiteaves, 1901, p. 84. Polynoe tarasovi Annenkova, 1937, p. 154, figs. 29, 30; 1938, p. 137.?Uschakov 1955, p. 137, fig. 27. Polynoe gracilis Hartman, 1959a, p. 101. DESCEIPTION.?Length up to 76 mm., width including setae up to 9 mm., segments 45 to 74. Body elongate, slender, with sides nearly- parallel. Prostomium without cephalic peaks or peaks weakly de- veloped. Elytra 15 pairs, oval, smooth, translucent, small, leaving middorsum and posterior end uncovered. Notosetae slender to moderately stout, spinous, tapering to blunt tips. Neurosetae stouter, with distal spinous regions and bare, slightly hooked tips. Color: brownish middorsally; elytra pigmented smoky brown on medial halves. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, silty clay, sand and gravel. Known to be commensal with the maldanid Nicomache lumbricalis (Fabricius) in Alaska (Berkeley and Berkeley, 1942) and off Halifax, Nova Scotia, and Cape Cod (Pettibone, 1954), and Gasp? Bay, Gulf of St. Lawrence. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Gasp? Bay and Bay of Chaleurs in Gulf of St. Lawrence, off Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts (Georges Bank), Connecticut, in 2 to 108 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Alaskan Arctic to Washington, north Japan, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Connecticut. In 2 to 123.5 fathoms. Enipo canadensia (Mclntosh, 1874) FIGURE 6,d-f Nemidia(1) canadensia Mclntosh, 1874, p. 265, pi. 10, figs. 5-9.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85. Enipo canadensis Pettibone, 1953, p. 23, pi. 8, figs. 63-72. Polynoe {Enipo) pavlovskii Uschakov, 1955, p. 170, figs. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 70 mm., width up to 8 mm., segments 50-90. Body long and slender, with conspicuous middorsal row of reddish-brown papillae or nodules, 2 per segment in tandem (fig, Gd). Elytra very small, subcircular, easily overlooked, occupying lateral regions only. Prostomium with prominent cephalic peaks, with 2 pairs of eyes, the anterior pah- much larger. Notosetae short, slender, very finely serrated, tapering to fine capillary tips. Neuro- setae of 2 kinds; Upper and few lower ones with long spinous regions, POLYCHAETE "WORMS, PABT 1 25 ending in slender sharp tips; middle ones stouter, with short spinous regions, ending in blunt, slightly hooked tips. Color, in life: colorless to yellowish, with light brown middorsal nodules; elytra light brownish on medial sides. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, sticky black mud, muddy sand, and mud with gravel and shells. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Gulf of St. Lawrence (Gasp? Bay near Cape Gasp?, 58 fathoms; 10 miles off Grande-Rivi?re in Bay of Chaleurs, 60 fathoms, 1959, P. Brunei). DisTEiBUTioN.?Gulf of St. Lawrcncc, north Japan, North Pacific (Washington). In 14 to 60 fathoms. Enipo torelli (Malmgren, 1865) FIGURE 6, g-i Nemidia torelli Malmgren, 1865, p. 84, pi. 13, fig. 22.?Ditlevsen, 1917, p. 39.? Augener, 1928, p. 697.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 154, figs. 20-22; 1938, p. 137.? Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 29,?Uschakov, 1955, p. 142, fig. 30,a-d. Nemidia (?) lawrenci Mclntosh, 1874, p. 266, pi. 10, figs. 9-11.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 50 mm., width up to 11 mm., seg- ments 47-52. Body linear, elongated, tapering posteriorly. Prosto- mium with distinct cephalic peaks, with 4 very small eyes (easily overlooked). Elytra 15 pairs, suboval, smooth, fairly large, nearly covering the dorsum, leaving posterior end uncovered. Notopodia with a spreading bundle of slender, finely spinous notosetae, tapering to capillary tips. Neurosetae stouter than notosetae, with long spinous regions, tapering to short pointed tips (not hooked). BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of soft mud, clay with gravel, stones, and rocks. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Gulf of St. Lawrence (south arm Gasp? Harbor, Gasp? Bay, 4 fathoms; Miscou Bank, Bay of Chaleurs, 16 fathoms; 10 miles off Grande-Rivi?re, Bay of Chaleurs, 60 fathoms, 1959, P. Brunei). DISTRIBUTION.?Spitsbergen, west Greenland, Gulf of St. Law- rence, north Japan. In 4 to 888 fathoms. Genus Hartmania Pettibone, 1955 Type (monotypy): Hartmania moorei Pettibone, 1955. Contains only one species. Hartmania moorei Pettibone, 1955 PlGTJRB 4,e-/ Hartmania moorei Pettibone, 1955, p. 124, fig. 5,a-e.?Stickney, 1959, p. 15. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 15 mm., width including setae up to 5.2 mm., segments up to 40. Elytra 15 pairs, cover the dorsum, 26 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULIiETIN 227 FIGURE 6.?Polynoidae, a-c, Enipo gracilis (after Verrill, 1874a):a,lower neuroseta; fe, upper neuroseta; c, notoseta. d-f, Enipo canadensis: d, dorsal view anterior end; e, upper neuroseta; /, middle neuroseta. g-i, Enipo torelli: g, prostomium; A, upper neuroseta; ?, middle neuroseta. j-k, ?rcteohia antico?iitnsis (after Mclntosh, 1874): ;, upper neu- roseta; k, lower neuroseta. l-m, Harmothoi acanellat (after Verrill, 1885a):?, parapodiura; m, neuroseta. smooth, without papillae or tubercles. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks, with 4 small eyes. Notosetae widest basally tapering gradually to short capillary tips. Neurosetae with long shafts and enlarged distal spinous regions, ending in short slender tips. Color: body colorless; elytra with crescent^haped pale to light rusty-brown areas on medial halves. POLYCHAETB WORMS, PART 1 27 BIOLOGY.?Found living commensally in the intertidal burrows of Nereis mrens Sars in the sandy mud (Newcastle, New Hampshire; Boothbay Harbor region, Maine). Small and rather fast moving, easily escapes notice. Found sharing the tube of the maldanid Praxillella gracilis (Sars) (Sheepscot River, Maine, 5 fathoms, 1955, R. W. Hanks). Dredged on bottoms of mud, fine sand, silty clay, and muddy sand in 3 to 90 fathoms. Females found filled with eggs in November (Newcastle, New Hampshire, 1954, G. M. Moore). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from Maine (Sheepscot estuary, Boothbay Harbor region), New Hampshire (Little Harbor, New- castle), Massachusetts (Georges Bank, Cape Cod), in low water to 90 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Maine (Boothbay Harbor region) to Massachusetts (Cape Cod). Low water to 90 fathoms. Genus Arcteobia Annenkova, 1937 Type (original designation) : Arcteobia aniicostiensis (Mclntosh, 1874). Contains only one New England species. Arcteobia aniicostiensis (Mclntosh 1874). FiQUBE 6,j,k Eupolyno? aniicostiensis Mclntosh, 1874, p. 265, pi. 10, figs. 1-4.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85. Eucranta arUicosiiensis Treadwell, 1948, p. 16, fig. 5&. Arcteobia aniicostiensis Pettibone, 1954, p. 225; 1956a, p. 551.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 146, fig. 32. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 26 mm., width including setae up to 8 mm., segments up to 36. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks; anterior pair of eyes anteroventral. Elytra 15 pairs, cover the dorsum, without fringes of papillae, smooth except for scattered microtubercles on anterior curved part. Upper notosetae shorter, stouter, with blunt tips; rest of notosetae with capillary tips. Few upper neurosetae longer, ending in sharp slender tips; rest of neuro- setae with bifid tips. Color: irregularly banded middorsally, greenish to greenish black; elytra with reddish brown pigmented areas. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of sandy mud and mud with various combinations of sand, pebbles, gravel, stones, rocl?s, and shells. Probably commensal in habit. Found living commensally in the sinuous tubes of the tercbellid Pista ?exuosa (Grube), one worm per tube (off Labrador, Pettibone, 1954). Found in the tubes of a maldanid (Gasp? Bay, 10-23 fathoms, June 1957, August 1958; Georges Bank, 42?51' N., 70?36' W,, 51 fathoms, July 1960). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Labrador, Gasp? Bay and Bay of Chaleurs in Gulf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts, in 3 to 95 fathoms, 569-457??3 3 28 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 DISTRIBUTION.?Arctic Alaska, Bering Sea, north Japan Sea, Labrador to Massachusetts. In low water to 123.5 fathoms. Genus Gattyana Mclntosh, 1897 Nychia Ma!mgren, 1865, preoccupied by St?l (1859, Hemiptera); type (mono- typy) : Nychia cirrosa (Pallas, 1766). All 3 species with 15 pairs of elytra, overlapping, covering the dorsum; eiytral surface covered with numerous microtubercles and lateral fringes of papillae. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks, anterior pair of eyes an tero ventral, not visible dors ally. Upper notosetae stouter, curved, with blunt tips; rest end in fine to capillary tips. Neurosetae with distal spinous regions and entire, slightly hooked tips. Color: variable, tan, tan mottled with brown, with or without a darker spot near elytrophore, with or without a darker streak middorsally. Key to the New England Species of Gattyana 1. With some larger conical macrotubercles in addition to the microtubercles (fig- 5a) G. nutti Without conical macrotubercles 2 2. Eiytral microtubercles 1 to 4 pronged (fig. 5??). Lower neurosetae with the bare distal tips not longer than the spinous regions (fig. 5d). G. cirrosa Eiytral microtubercles conical and bifid (fig. 5c). Lower neurosetae with the bare tips as long as or longer than the spinous regions (fig. 5g}. G. amondseni Gattyana cirrosa (Pallas, 1766) FIGURE 5,b-d Nychia cirrosa Verrill, 1881, pp. 306, 311.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 700; 1887, p. 708.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 86. Gattyana cirrosa Fauvel, 1923, p. 49, fig. 17, a-/.?Procter, 1933, p. 135.?Tread- well, 1948, p. 19, fig. 76.?Miner, 1950, p. 307, p!. 100.?Petti bone, 1953, p. 41, pi. 20; 1954, p. 226, fig. 26&; 1956a, p. 551.?Davenport, 1953, p. 169. Newelt, 1954, p. 333.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 143, fig. 31.?Southward, 1956, p. 257.?Clark, 1960, p. 11.?Eliason, 1962, p. 217. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 47 mm., width including setae up to 12 mm., segments 35-38. Eiytral microtubercles simple, bifid or quatrifid, the latter especially characteristic (not so prominent when commensal). Elytra with long papillae scattered on the surface as well as on the external borders, usually covered with debris, giving a straggly appearance. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on various combinations of mud, sand, pebbles, gravel, with shells, sponges, algae, mud tubes. Found at low water on rocky ledges with muck, on rocks in encrusting calcareous algae. Single specimen found among the fouling organisms on buoys, etc.. POLTCHAETB WORMS, PABT 1 29 in the oc?anographie fouling studies in the New England region. Found among oysters (South Carolina). Found living commensally in the mud tubes of the terebellid Amphitrite johnstoni Malmgren (includes A. brunnea and A. figulus) in both the western Atlantic (Mount Desert region, Gulf of Maine, Procter, 1933; Eastport, Maine, Webster and Benedict, 1887; St. Andrews, New Brunswick, under rocks, Pettibone, 1955; Machias Bay and Boothbay Harbor region, Maine, sandy mud and gravelly sand flats, Pettibone, 1955; Fort Stark, Newcastle, New Hampshire, G. M. Moore, collected in 1956) and eastern Atlantic (British shores, Mclntosh, 1900). Found sharing the tubes of Chmtopterus variopedatus (Renier) (Ireland, Southern, 1914; Isle of Man, Southward, 1956). Found also in lugworm burrows (British shores, Newell, 1954). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence (St. Lawrence estuary, Gasp? Bay, Bay of Chaleurs), Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Maine, New Hampshire, Massachusetts (Cape Cod and Vineyard Sound), South Carolina, in low water to 129 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Arctic, Iceland, Norway to France, Hudson Bay to South Carolina, Bering Sea to Washington, north Japan Sea. In low water to 630 fathoms. Gattyana amondseni (Malmgren, 1867) FIGURE 5,?-g Nychia amondseni VerriU, 1881, pp. 303, 306.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 700.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 86. Gallyana amondseni Treadwelt, 1948, p. 20, fig. 7c.?Grainger, 1954, p. 509.? Uschakov, 1955, p. 143, fig. 31.?Pettibone, 1956:1, p. 552.?Eliason, 1962, p. 216. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 30 mm., width including setae up to 12 mm., segments 35, 36. Elytral microtubercles conical and bifid; elytral fringe confined mostly to external borders. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, silty clay, and mud with rocks, sand, pebbles, gravel, red algae. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence (Gasp? Bay, South Anticosti Island, Bay of Chaleurs), Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, in low water to 120 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?-Arctic, Alaska, Norway, Hudson Bay to Rhode Island. In low water to 378 fathoms. Gattyana nutti Pettibone, 1955 FIGURE SO Gattyana nutti Pettibone, 1955, p. 119, fig. 2,o-/. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 17 mm., width including setae up to 5 mm., segments 35, 36. Elytral macrotubercles conical; micro- 30 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 tubercles entire or bifid, few quatrifid. Elytra with long papillae scattered on the surface as well as on external borders. BIOLOGT.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, mud with rocks, coral, fine sand and pebbles. , MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Oflf Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence (Bay of Chaleurs), Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts (Cape Cod), in 25 to 67 fathoms. DiSTRiBUTiofT.?Southern Labrador coast (Strait of BeUe Isle) to Massachusetts (Cape Cod). In 25 to 67 fathoms. Genus Ant?no?lla Augener, 1928 Type (designated by Uschakov, 1955): Antino?lla sard (Malm- gren, 1865). Both species have the anterior pair of eyes at the level of the greatest prostomial width, visible dorsally. Elytra 15 pairs, easily deciduous. Notopodia and neuropodia extending into conspicuous digitiform acicular lobes. Setae golden yellow. Notosetae much thicker than neurosetae, finely spinous, with short pointed to blunt smooth tips. Key to the New England Species of Antino?lla 1. Neurosetae of two kinds: With capillary tips and with slender, relatively obtuse and slightly curved tips (fig. T,h~j). Prostomium with anterior pair of eyes larger than posterior pair (fig. 7e) A. sarsi All neurosetae with long, flexible capillary tips (fig, 7,i-m). Prostomium with four subequal eyes (fig. 7k) A. angusta Antino?t?a sarsi (Malmgren, 1865) FiauRB 7,e-j AnttnoB sarsi Verrill, 1881, pp. 297, 303, 306, 307, 311.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85.? Treadwell, 1948, p. 17, ?g. 6o.?Miner, 1950, p. 304, pi. 99,?Pettibone, 1954, p. 215; 1956a, p. 547. Antino?lla sarsi Uschakov, 1955, p. 160, fig. 43; 1957, p. 1665.?Hartman, 1959a, p. 62. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 68 mm., width including setae up to 27 mm., segments 37, 38. Elytra large, thin, soft, smooth, with scat- tered microtubercles and short delicate cl?vate papillae. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud with gravel, stones. Swims quickly by making use of its long parapodia ; may be pelagic. Found in stomach of haddock (43?39' N., 60"30' W., June 20, 1953, R. Wigley). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence (Bay of Chaleurs), Massachusetts (Georges Bank), in 6 to 70 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Norway to Great Britain, the Baltic, Labrador to Massachusetts, Bering Sea, north Japan Sea. In 3 to 1,215 fathoms. POIiYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 31 ?r^ FIGURE 7.?Polynoidae, a-d, Harmotha? imbricata: a, dorsal view prostojnium and tentacular segment (ventral anterior pair of eyes visible through translucent prostomiura); h, elytron; c, tip of notoseta; d, tip of neuroseta. e-j, Antino?lla sarji (after Malmgren, 1865): e, dorsal view anterior end;/, parapodium from sctiger 13, posterior view; g, notoseta; h, upper neuroseta; i, rniddle neuroseta; /, lower nruroseta. k-m, Antino?lla angvsla: k, prostomium; /, upper neuroseta; m, lower neuroseta. Antino?lla augusta (Verrill, 1874) FlouRE 7,k?m Antino? augusta Verrill, in Smith, Harger, and Verrill, 1874, pp. 22, 36.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 23, figs. 13-18. Antino?lla augusta Hartman, 19?9a, p. 62. 32 u.a. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 25 mm., width including setae up to 7 mm., segments 36. Elytra relatively large, covering dorsum, with scattered microtubercles over complete surface and with additional elongate filiform papillae on exposed part, with brownish pigment on medial halves. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, clay and silty clay. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Massachusetts (Georges Bank), 90 to 130 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Few scattered records from Gulf of Maine to Cape Cod, Massachusetts. In 72 to 150 fathoms. Genus AustrolaeniHa Bergstr?m, 1916; emend. Pettibone, 1955 Type (monotypy): AustrolaenUla ant?rctica Berg?tr?m, 1916. Both species have the prostomium with four large eyes, visible dorsally, with distinct cephalic peales. Notopodia and neuropodia with prominent digitifonn acicular lobes. Setae golden yellow. Notosetae shorter and stouter than neurosetae, with numerous spinous rows. Neurosetae slender, spinous, with secondary tooth and hairs on distal tip. Key to the New England Species of AustrolaeniHa 1. Elytra 15 pairs. Neurosetae with hairs extending up to or slightly beyond distal tip (flg. 4c). Notosetae arched, with spinous rows extending nearly to distal tip A. lanelleae Elytra 16 pairs. Neurosetae with hairs longer (fig. id). Notosetae nearly straight, with pointed bare tips A. mollis AustrolaeniHa mollis (Sars, 1871) FIGURE 4d Laenilla mollis Sara, 1873, p. 207, pi. 14.?VerriU, in Smith, Harger, and Verrill, 1874, pp. 16, 35. Antinoe mollis Mclntosh, 1900, p. 369, figs. Harmotho? mollis Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 24. Antino?lla mollis Hartman, 1969a, p. 83. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 50 mm., width including setae up to 23 mm., segments up to 43. Body large, flattened dorsoventrally, banded with brown. Elytra 16 pairs, large, thin, soft, transparent, covering the dorsum except for last few posterior segments, smooth except for few scattered pointed papillae on surface (may be lacking) and few microtubercles on anterior curved part. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, sandy mud, and gravel. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Newfoundland, Gulf of St. Lawrence (South Anticosti Island), Massachusetts (Georges Bank, Martha's Vineyard, Provincetown), in 20 to 471 fathoms. POTJYCHAETE WOBMS, PART 1 33 DISTRIBUTION.?West Greenland, off Norway, Faroes, Iceland, Danish waters, off Newfoundland to Massachusetts. In 20 to 471 fathoms. Austrolaenilla Itmelleae (Pettibone, 1955) FIGURE 4C Austrolaenilla lanelleae Pettibone, 1955, p. 118, fig. 1,0-/. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 23 mm., width including setae up to 7.5 mm,, segments 40, 41. Elytra missing. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of sandy mud, associated with numerous specimens of the commensal polynoid, Harmotho? acanellae. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Martha's Vineyard, Massachusetts, 458 fathoms; 39?48' N., 71?06' W., 700 fathoms, August 27, 1959, R. Wigley. DISTRIBUTION.?Off Massachusetts. In 458 to 700 fathoms. Genus Eucranta Malmgren, 1865 Eupoiyno? Mclntosh, 1874; type (herein designated): Eupolyno? occidenialis Mclntosh. 1874; = EM crania villosa Malmgren, 1865. Type (raonotypy) : Eucranta villosa Malmgren, 1865. Contains only one New England species. Eucranta villosa Malmgren, 1865. FIGURE 4,a,6 Eucranta villosa Malmgren, 1865, p. 80, pi. 10, fig. 9.?Verrill, in Smith, Harger, and Verrill, 1874, pp. 22, 37. Eupolyno? occidenialis Mclntosh, 1874, p. 264, pi, 9, figs. 8-13.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85. Eucranta occidenialis Treadwell, 1948, p. 16, fig. 5c. Harmotho? villosa Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 25; 1953, p. 22. harrriotho? {Encrante) villosa Eliason, 1962, p. 221. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 53 mm., width including setae up to 14 mm,, segments 36-40. Elytra 15 pairs, covering the dorsum, with numerous papillae scattered on surface as well as on posterior and lateral borders, with scattered micro tubercles on anterior curved part. Prostomium with cephalic peaks weakly developed, anterior pair of eyes larger than posterior pair, anterolateral in position. Setae golden yellow. Notosetae form a very bushy bundle; they are short, stout, strongly curved, with spinous rows extending almost to tip. Neurosetae longer, with spinous rows. Upper neurosetae with tips slender, nearly straight, split or forceps-like (fig. 46) ; middle and lower ones shorter, with long bare entire tips. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, sand, and gravel. MATEHIAL EXAMINED.?Gulf of St. Lawrence, Massachusetts (Georges Bank, Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard), in 105-410 fathoms. 34 U.S. NATIONAL MUSETJM BULLETIN 227 DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Norway to Denmark, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Massachusetts, Bering Sea. In 9 to 609 fathoms. Genus Hartnotho? Kinberg, 1835 Evartie Malmgren, 1865; preoccupied by Adama (1853, Moll.); type (mono- typy): Evarne impar Malmgren, 1865 (not Polyno? impar Johnston, 1839); = Harmotho? fragilis Moore, 1910 (see below, p. 39). Evarnella Chamberlin, 1919, new name for Evarne, preoccupied. Type (designated by Bergstr?m, 1916): Harmotho? spinosa Kin- berg, 1855. Subgenus Hermadion Kinberg, 185S Type (designated by Bergstr?m, 1916) : Hermadion magalhaensis Kinberg, 1855. Subgenus Lagisca Malmgren, 186S Type (monotypy): Lagisca rarispina (Sars, 1860); ?Harmotho? extenuata Grube, 1840. Subgenua Eunoe Malmgren, 1865 Type (designated by Uschakov, 1965): Euno? nodosa (Sars, 1860). All the species represented have the body relatively short (35-80 segments), widest in anterior third, attenuated posteriorly, frag- menting and losing elytra readily. Elytra 15 pairs, covering the dorsum except for the more posterior segments in the longer species; elytra provided with chitinous conical microtubercles, with or with- out additional macrotubercles. Notosetae as stout as or stouter than the neurosetae, with well-marked spinous rows and smooth blunt to pointed tips (fig. 7c). Neurosetae with elongated spinous regions, with tips slightly hooked, with or without a secondary subterminal tooth (fig. 7d). Key to the New England Species of Harmotho? 1. Segments more than 50 (50-80). Notosetae few in number (4-10). H. (Hermadion) acanellae (p.35) Segments less than 60 (35-49). Notosetae more numerous 2 2. Anterior pair of eyes anteroventral, not visible dorsally (fig. 7a). H. imbricata (p.36) Anterior pair of eyes anterolateral, visible dorsally (fig. 8a) 3 3. Elytra with microtubercles only or with additional globular to rodlike soft macrotubercles (figs. 8,b-c,e,g; 9,e,ff). Neurosetae with tips entire or with secondary tooth (fig. 7d) 4 Elytra with microtubercles and additional nodular to spiny macrotubercles (fig. 9,5,d). Neurosetae with entire bare tips (fig. 9c) 8 POLYCHAETE WORMS, PABT 1 35 4. Elytra with few scattered microtubercles mostly on anterior half of elytra (fig. 8?f). All neurosetae with tips bifid (with secondary tooth). H. dearbomi (p.88) Elytra with microtubercles more numerous 5 5. With a distinct nuchal fold posterior to prostomium (fig. Sd). Neurosetae with large secondary tooth at base of long bare tip (fig. 8/). H. macginitiei (p.39) Without distinct nuchal fold. Neurosetae with tips entire (fig 9/) or with secondary tooth close to tip (fig. 7d) 6 6. Elytra with microtubercles only, short conical to elongate conical or spinelike (fig. 9e). Neurosetae with short bare entire tips (fig. 9/). H. (Eunoii) spinulosa (p.42) Elytra usually with additional macrotubercles. Microtubercles not spine- like. Neurosetae with longer bare tips, with or without secondary tooth or remnant of one 7 7. Elytra with soft macrotubercles near posterior border, wider at base, not sharply set off from elytral surface (fig. 9g) H. fragil is (p. 39) Elytra with soft macrotubercles (may be absent), globular, sausage shaped or elongate, rodlike, not wider at base and sharply set off from elytral surface (fig. 8,b, c) H. (Lagisca) exten?ala (p.41) 8. Elytra with macrotubercles confined to single row near external border, nodu- lar, with roughened tips (fig. 96). Extra rounded lobes on inner sides of elytrophores and dorsal tubercles (lobes corresponding to elytrophores on non-elytra-bearing segments; fig. 9it) H. (Euno?) nodosa (p 44) Elytra with macrotubercles branched, scattered on elytral surface (fig. Qd). Without extra rounded lobes on inner sides of elytrophores and dorsal tubercles H. (Euno?) oersted! (p.44) Harmolho? (Ilermadion) acanellae (Vcrrill, 1881) FIGURE 6,l,m Polyno? (Eunoa) acanellae Verrill, 1881, pi. 6, fig. 6; 1885a, p. 525, p). 39, fig. 172; 1885b, p. 424.?Hartman, l?42b, p. 27, figs. 27-31; 1944a, p. 337, pi. 14, fig. 9; 1959a, p. 98.?Miner, 1950, p. 302, pi. 99. Harmotho? acanellae Ditlevsen, 1917, p. 27, pi. 1, figs. 6, 8-9, 13, pi. 2, fig. 4.? Wesenberg-Lund, 1950a, p. 7; 1951, p. 15. DEBCEIPTION.?Length up to 90 mm., width including setae up to 15 mm., segments 50-80. Elytra 15 pairs, easily deciduous, large, cover dorsum except for middorsum and posterior end, elongate oval, thin, translucent, appearing smooth but provided with numerous close-set conical microtubercles, without fringe of papillae, palo yellowish white and more or less speckled with orange brown. Prosto- mium with 4 large eyes, subequal, visible dorsally, with distinct cephalic peaks. Notopodia and neuropodia with prolonged slender acicular lobes. Notosetae few in number (4-10), stout, with rather long bare acute tips. Neurosetae with long spinous regions and long bare hooked tips. Proboscis large, dark purple. BIOLOGY.?Dredged mostly in deeper waters, associated with corals. They have been found living commensally among the branches of the horny coral Acanella arhuscvla (J. Y. Johnson), where they 36 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 are found among the close branches near the base of the coral, moving about among the branches and where thoy may be very abundant (Verrill, Ditlevsen) ; also with the horny coral Acanthogorgia armata Verrill {Alhalross Station 2528). They have also been found with the sea pen Pennatida grandis Ehrenberg (collections in USNM) and the soft coral Anthomastus grandiflorus Verrill (Ditlevsen). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from of? Nova Scotia, Grand Banks, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Chesapeake Bay, North Carolina, in 23 to 1,230 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?West Greenland, Iceland, Faroes, Denmark, off Nova Scotia to North Carolina. In 23 to 1,230 fathoms. Harmotho? inibricata (Linnc, 1767) FiGUBB 7,a-d Harmotho? imhricata Verrill, 1881 (part?mixed with H. exten?ala), pp. 290, 293, 296, 300, 303, 307, 311, 316, pi. 6, fig. l,a-d.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 701; 1887, p. 709.?Whlteaves, 1901, p. 84.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 617 (part ?).?Kindle, 1917, p. 150.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 55, fig. 18,/-i; 1953, p. 42, fig. 19,/-?.?Pr?fontaine, 1932, p. 207.?Procter, 1933, p. 135 (part ?).?Treadwell, 1948, p. 17, fig. ?d.-Miner, 1950, p. 306, pi. 100.? Pratt, 1951, p. 328,?Pettibone, 1953, p. 32, pis. 13-16; 1954, p, 220, fig. 26,a,e; 1956a, p. 549.?Newell, 1954, p. 333.?Uschaltov, 1955, p. 154, fig. 38.?Rasmussen, 1956, p. 8, figs. 4-6.?Costello, et al., 1957, p. 76.?Stickney, 1959, p. 16.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 36.?Clark, 1960, p. 11. Harmotho? hartmanae Pettibone, 1948, p. 412, fig. l,a-/. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 65 mm., width including setae up to 19 mm., segments 36-39. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks, anterior pair of eyes anteroventral near cephalic peaks?not visible dorsally (may be seen through translucent prostomium, especially when living). Elytra with scattered conical microtubercles, with or without few to numerous, brownish to reddish, globular to elongate cylindrical macrotubercles in one to several irregular rows near posterior border, with or without short fringe of papillae. Neurosctae with long spinous regions and bare hooked tips, usually with a sub- terminal tooth (fig. 7d). Color: Body irregularly pigmented dorsally, greyish to blackish, dark green or brown. Elytra show remarkable color variations both as to color and color pattern. Color includes various shades of grey, black, green, red, brown, and tan, with or without additional black flecks. Color pattern includes speckled and mottled coloration with a light spot near the elytrophore, with or without a darker spot (giving the appearance of an "eye" on each elytron). Uniformly colored, with or without a darker spot near the elytrophore. Inner fourth to half of elytra uniformly colored, outer part without color or few scattered spots, thus forming a wide middorsal longitudinally striped pigmented band. A dark border on median, posterior, and POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 37 lateral borders and completely encircling the first pair of elytra (the color variety of H. hartmanae). BIOLOGY.?A ubiquitous species, one of the most common and abundant polynoids in all northern waters, found both intertidally and dredged in the Arctic, North Atlantic, and North Pacific. Inter- tidally, found clinging to rough surfaces of stones; in cracks and crevices; in rocky tide pools with algae and cavities of sponges; in roots and eelgrass {Zostera), and sea basketgrass (Phyllospadix) ; in holdfasts and on fronds of kelp (as Laminaria), under encrusting calcareous algae, on pilings, wharves, submerged wood work, among bryozoans, hydroids, tunicates, barnacles, and mussels. One of the most abundant polychaetes of the oc?anographie fouhng studies in the New England region. Dredged on all types of bottoms?on bottoms of mud, sand, and rock and various combinations of shell, rock, gravel, mud, and sand; among brown, red, and green algae (often tending to match in coloration the algae on which it is found) ; among mussels, sponges, barnacles, bryozoans, hydroids, tunicates, and sand dollars; and in and among old worm tubes. Found living commensally with other polychaetes, as the terebel- lids Thelepus crispus Johnson (Washington, Pettibone, 1953) and Amphitrite robusta (Johnson) (British Columbia, Berkeley and Berke- ley, 1948) and the onuphid Diopatra ornata Moore (Washington, Pettibone, 1953). Found with hermit crabs occupying snail shells, the polynoid often found in the apex of the shell (Carr Inlet, Puget Sound, Washington, 10 fathoms, associated with Pagurus ochotensis Brandt inside a shell of Polinices lewisii (Gould), J. E. Lynch; Ber- ing Sea, 33 fathoms, Albatross Station 3303, found in apex of shell). Also found in the ambulacral groove of the asteroid Asterias amurensis Lutken (Japan, Okuda, 1936). Attached to various parts of the dorsal surface under the elytra of adult females, the eggs and various stages up to advanced trocho- phores may be found clumped together like a loose bunch of grapes by a transparent mucous secretion. Eggs or larvae under the elytra found in Japan during March and April (Izuka, 1912), in Washington in June, July, August (Pettibone, 1953), in central California in June (Hartman, 1944b), in Norway in February and March (M. Sars, 1845, as Polyno? cirrata), in Denmark in January (Rasmussen, 1956), in Iceland in April and May (Saemundsson, 1918), in Britain in February to May (Meintosh, 1900) and in December (Newell, 1954), in Ireland in March (Southern, 1914), in New Hampshire in February and April (Fort Stark, 1954, February 15 and April 1 and 7, Pettibone). In the Woods Hole region, Massachusetts, females of presumably this species ("Harmothoe sp."-?could also be H. ex- tenuata) found with pink eggs inside the body from mid-April through 38 TJ.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 May; induced to shed eggs in the Laboratory (Mead, 1897, 1898; Bumpus, 1898a-c) ; none observed with eggs under the scales. Ras- mussen (1956) found larvae in plankton in Denmark waters from November to April, with a maximum in January and February; he gives a detailed account of early stages. Harmotho? imbricata seems to have great powers of dispersal and adaptation. Among the contributing factors, the following may be mentioned: The habit of the female protecting the eggs by carrying them under the elytra, the relatively long planktotrophic larval life (Thorson, 1946; Rasmussen, 1956), and the adaptability to living both free-living and commensally. According to Rasmussen, young bottom stages of 9 or more setigers and 4 pairs of elytra may be found in the plankton also. Larger individuals (up to 7-9 mm. in length) may live as true bottom animals and for a time?before fully grown?semipelagically, swimming briskly in the water at some distance from the bottom. An active swimmer, swimming by mak- ing undulatory movements of the body. Very euryhaline, withstand- ing rather fresh water (enters the Baltic and reaches into the interior of the Gulf of Finland (Ditlevsen, 1937). Found in salt ponds of low salinity in Rhode Island (Charlestown Pond, November 12, 1954, H. P. Jeffries). Withstands great range in temperature. Great powers of accomodation bathometrically?whUe most common in coastal areas, taken also from great depths (up to 2,030 fathoms in southwestern Greenland). Great adaptability in habitat, living on a great variety of bottoms. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Long Island Sound, intertidal to 150 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland and Norway to Mediterranean and Adriatic, Labrador to New Jer- sey, Bering Sea to southern California, Japan, Yellow Sea, Indian Ocean. In low water to 2,030 fathoms. Harmotko? dearbomi Pettibone, 1955 FIGURE 8g Harmotho? dearbomi Pettibone, 1955, p. 121, fig. 3,o-t. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 13 mm., width including setae up to 4 mm., segments 35. Dorsally body rusty red with 2 narrow white bands per segment. Elytra thin, transparent, rusty red with white flecks, without fringe of papillae; elytral surface smooth except for delicate scattered short papillae and scattered low microtubercles which are mostly confined to the anterior half. Prostomium with dis- tinct cephalic peaks, anterior third of prostomium dark brown. Dorsal cirri pigmented on basal third and with a darker subterminal ring. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 39 BIOLOGY.?Found attached to floating gulfweed, as Sargassum, which, it matches in coloration. Specimen massed with eggs (Sep- tember 1953, Vineyard Sound). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens attached to gulfweed, Vineyard Sound, Massachusetts, DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Vineyard Sound). On floating gulfweed, Harmotho? ntacginitiei Pettibone, 195.? FIGURE S,d-J' Harmotho? macginitiei Pettibone, 1955, p. 122, fig. 4,o-i. DESCRIPTION,-?Length up to 20 mm., width including setae up to 9 mm,, segments 36, Body wide, greatly flattened. Elytra large, imbricated, completely covering the dorsum, with numerous micro- tubercles which gradually get larger more posteriorly on each elytron; microtubercles conical, pointed, some bifid, some quadrifid or irregular, with thick fringe of papillae on lateral and posterior elytral borders as well as on surface. Prostomium with cephalic peaks blunt or poorly developed, with 4 small eyes. Setae golden yellow. Kotosetae form a very thick bushy bundle, extending almost as far distally as the ncurosetae; upper ones shorter, more arched; rest longer, with rather long bare pointed tips and long spinous rows. Neurosetae with long bare hooked tips and with straight secondary tooth some distance from the tip. BIOLOGY.?Found intertidally in muddy sand, where it was dug under water. MATERIAL EXAMINED,?Known from a single specimen collected at low tide, Hadley Harbor, Naushon Island, Massachusetts. DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Elizabeth Islands). Low water. Harmotho? fragilis Moore, 1910 PiGUHE 9?f Emrne impar Malmgren, 1865, p, 71, pi. 9, fig, 7,?Verrill. 1881, p. 319.?Not Polyrw? impar Johnston, 1839. Polyno? impar Thiel, 1879, pp. 9, 15.?Not Johnston, 1839. Harmotho? (Evarne) fragilis Moore, 1910, p, 353, pi. 29, figs, 29, 30, pi. 30, figs. 31-33. Harmotho? impar Ditlevsen, 1917, p. 12, fig. 1, pi. 2, fig. 16, pi. 3, fig. 11.?Not Fauvel, 1923, p. 59, fig, 21,a-/,?tFschakov, 1955, p. 157, fig. 41.?Pettibone, 1956a, p. 550.?Eiiason, 1962, p. 217.?Not Polyno? impar Johnston, 1839. Evarnella fragilis Hartman, 1959a, p. 75; 1960b, p. 79. DESCRIPTION,?Length up to 26 mm,, width including setae up to 12 mm., segments 37-41. Prostomium with cephalic peaks prominent, eyes large, anterior pair in region of greatest prostomial width. 40 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 8.?Polynoidae, a-c, Ilarmoiko?exUntiaia: a, dorsal view prostomium and tentacular segment; b, elytron of var. propincua; e, elytron of var. rarispina. d-f, Harmotko? mac- ginil?i: d, prostomium; e, elytron;/, tip of neuroseta. g, Harmoikoi dearborni, elytron. Body darkly pigmentcd dorsally, with wide transverse, somewhat interrupted brown bands. Elytra with mottled brownish coloration. Elytral microtubercles conical, hooked; soft macrotubercles near ex- ternal border, not sharply set off from elytral surface, wide at base (may give border of elytra a scalloped effect). BIOLOGY.?Dredged on mixed bottoms of gravel, mud, and sand. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from off Labrador, Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts, in 20 to 112 fathoms. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PAKT 1 41 DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Danish seas, Labrador to Massachusetts, southern CaUfornia, north Japan Sea. In 1 to 1,611 fathoms. Hartnotho? (Lagisca) exten?ala (Grube, 1840) FIGURE 8,a-c Lagisca rarispina Malmgren, 1865, p. 65, pi. 8, fig. 2.?Verrill, 1881, pp. 311, 314.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 700; 1887, p. 709.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 85. Lagisca propinqua Malmgren, 1867, p. 9, pi. 1, fig. 3,a-e.?Verril], in Smith, Harger, and Verrill, 1874, p. 20. Lagisca rarispina var. occidentalis Mclntosh, 1874, p. 262, pi. 9, figs. 1-4. Whit- eaves, 1901, p. 86. Lagisca impatiens Webster, 1886, p. 129, pi. 4, figs. 1-7. Lagisca exten?ala Fauvel, 1923, p. 76, fig. 28,a-m.?St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 11, fig. 7.?Newel!, 1954, p. 333.?Hartman, 1959a, p. 84.?Banse, 1959, p. 422.? Clark, 1960, p. 12.?Eliason, 19G2, p. 222. Harmothoe ezienuata Pettibone, 1953, p. 31; 1954, p. 222; 1956a, p. 549. Harmothoe rarispina Uschakov, 1965, p, 155, fig. 37. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 74 mm., width including setae up to 20 mm., segments 37-47. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks, anterior pair of eyes anterolateral, visible dorsally, slightly anterior to widest part of prostomium. Elytra with numerous conical micro- tubercles with tips blunt, pointed or bifid, with short fringe of papil- lae on external border; with or without additional macro tub ?reles? when present, distinctly set off from the elytral surface, usually nar- rower at the base, translucent to brownish, smooth, globular (var. propinqua, fig. 8,i), sausage-shaped or elongate fusiform (var. rari- spina, fig. 8,c) ; macrotubercles variable in number, 0-9 near posterior border, 0-13 scattered near center of elytron. Neurosetae with enlarged long spinous regions, with tips slightly hooked, with small secondary tooth present, as remnant only, or absent entirely (in var. occidentalis and var. impatiens only few neurosetae have a secondary tooth or remnant of one; in some absent entirely). Color: body irregularly pigmented dorsally, somewhat banded, brownish to grayish green; elytra variable in coloration, uniformly tan to mottled with brown, red, dark grey, yellow, some- times with a darker or yellow spot near the elytrophore. BIOLOGY.?An abundant and widely distributed species in the Arctic, North Atlantic, and North Pacific, found both intertidally and dredged at considerable depths. Often associated with two other common northern polynoids?Lepidonoius squamatus and Harmothoe imbricata (often confused and lumped with the latter spe- cies). Intertidally found under rocks, in rocky tide pools with algae, sponges, etc., in encrusting calcareous algae, among holdfasts and 42 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETDT 227 on fronds of kelp, as Laminaria (washed up on the beach after a storm along with Laminaria, Fucus, etc.); found on pilings among mussels, tunicates, sponges, hydroids, etc.; abundant on beds of MytiliLS edulis. Third most abundant polynoid in the oc?anographie fouling studies in the New England region. Dredged on all types of bottom?mud, rocks, shells, and various combinations of mud, sand, pebbles, rocks, gravel, stones, along with algae, shells, coral, sponges, bryozoan nodules, hydroids, barnacles, ascidians, mussels, and worm tubes. Some females with coral pink eggs inside the body found in April (Fort Stark, New Hampshire, April 7, 1954); others with eggs ex- truded and carried between the parapodia and on the ventral surface (not on the dorsal surface as in H. imbricata). Harmotho? exten?ala, along with H. imbricata, appears to have great powers of dispersal and adaptation, showing great adaptability to bathym?trie range?from tide pools to considerable depths (up to 1,000 fathoms). It appears to have even gi-eater adaptability to temperature and salinity than does H. imbricata. Along the Labrador coast, it penetrates the Greater Lake Melville Estuary as well as the outer coast, while H. imbricata was not found in the Estuary (Pettibone, 1956a). It has been found in salt ponds of low salinity in Rhode Island (Charlestown Pond, May 13, 1954, H. P. Jeffries). It has been found in Chesapeake Bay (Pettibone, 1954). MATEKIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence to off Delaware and Chesapeake Bay, intertidal to 705 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Faroes, Norway to Mediterranean and Adriatic, Hudson Bay to Chesapeake Bay, Bering Sea to southern California, north Japan Sea, South Africa. In low water to 1,000 fathoms. Harmotho? (,Eun?>?) spinu?osa (Verrill, 1879) FIGURE 9,?,/ Eunoa spinulosa Verrill, 1879, p. 169. P?lyno? {Eunoa) spinulosa Verrill, 1881, pi. 7, fig. 6. Euno? spinulosa Hartman, 1942b, p. 24, figs. 19-22. DESCEIPTION.?Length up to 43 mm., width including setae up to 16 mm., segments 46-49. Prostomium with distinct cephalic peaks. Elytra large, light colored, with numerous micro tubercles?short, conical to elongate spinelike, with papillae scattered on surface and near edge. Neurosetae with long spinous regions and short bare hooked entire tips. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 43 FIGURE 9.?Polynoidae, a-c, Harmotho? nodosa: a, dorsal view part of 2 segments showing extra lobes medial to dorsal tubercle and eiytrophore; b, elytron; c, tip of neuroseta. d, Harmoiho? oerstedi, elytron, e-f, Harmotho? spinulosa: e, elytron; /, tip of neuroseta. g, Harmothot fragilis, elytron. BIOLOGY.?Dredged in deeper waters. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from off Nova Scotia to off Martha's Vineyard, Massachusetts, 183 to 640 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Off Nova Scotia to Massachusetts. In 183 to 640 fathoms. 569-457?63- 44 U.S. NATIONAL MITSEUM BULLETIN 227 Harmothoe (,Eunoe) nodosa (Sars, 1860) FIGURE 9,O-C Euno? nodosa Malmgren, 1865, p. 64, pi. 8, fig. 4.?Procter, 1933, p. 135.?Petti- bone, 1954, p. 217, fig. 26c; 1956a, p. S48.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1956a, p. 234.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 152, figs. 34-35. Eunoa nodosa Verrill, 1881, pp. 298, 303, 307, 311, 314.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 700; 1887, p. 708.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 86. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 90 mm,, width including setae up to 39 mm., segments 36, 37. Prostomium with cephalic peaks short and blunt or lacking. Elytra with fringe of long papillae on external border; elytral microtubercles close set, low, flattened, semiglobose, some bifid; elytral macrotubercles confined mostly to a single row near external border, dark colored to pale yellow, nodular, with roughened tips or a fascicle of short spikes. Color : dorsal surface of body colorless or banded with olive brown; elytra yellow or tannish mottled with reddish brown. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, stones, rubble, and various combinations of mud, sand, stones, pebbles, gravel, rocks, and shells. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence (Gasp? Bay, Bay of Chaleurs, south Anticosti Island), Grand Manan, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts, New Jersey, in 10 to 150 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Bering Sea, north Japan Sea, Iceland, Scandinavian coasts to English Channel, Hudson Bay to New Jersey. In 10 to 690 fathoms. Hartnotho? {Euno?) oerstedi (Malmgren, 1865) FIGURE M Euno? oerstedi Malmgren, 1865, p. 61, pi. 8, fig. 3.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 618.?Pettibone, 1953, p. 46, pi. 23; 1954, p. 219, fig. 26rf; 1956a, p. 548.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p, 36. Eunoa oerstedi Verrilt, 1881, pp. 290, 303, 306, 307. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 80 mm., width including setae up to 30 mm., segments 37-42. Prostomium with cephalic peaks poorly developed or lacking. Elytra with lateral fringe of papillae, with numerous microtubercles one to many pronged; macrotubercles branched, extremely variable in size, number, arrangement, and shape, translucent or brownish. Color: dorsal surface dusky, dark or greenish black; elytra mottled with brown and grey. BIOLOGY.?Found at low water in rocky tide pools (Sea Point near Kittery, Maine, June 27, 1958). Dredged on various types of bot- tom?mud, sand, pebbles, gravel, stones, roclis, rubble, with shells, POLTCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 45 coral, algae. Four specimens were obtained from the oc?anographie fouling studies in the New England region (Gulf of Maine). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from Labrador, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, in low water to 110 fathoms. DisTRiBtjTiON.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Norway to English Cliannel, Labrador to Rhode Island, Bering Sea to central California, Yellow Sea, Japan. In low water to 516 fathoms. Family Sigalionidae Body usually long, narrow, cylindrical, vermiform, with numerous segments. Elytra numerous pairs, borne on knoblike elytrophores, on alternate segments in anterior region (segments 2, 4, 6, 7, etc.) and on all the segments of the posterior region (from segment 23 in Pholo? or segment 27 in Sthenelais, Sigalion, Leanira). Segments bearing no elytra have knoblike dorsal tubercles, without dorsal cirri (except sometimes on third segment). In the burrowing forms, which are found buried in mud or sand some centimeters below the surface (e.g., species of Sigalion, Sthenelais, Leanira), all segments except the anterior few have cirriform branchiae, ciliated on the inner border, on lateral sides of the elytrophores and dorsal tubercles hanging down below the elytra. On concave area between branchia and noto- podium is a ciliated area, usually in the form of three cushions or ctenidia provided with long vibratile cilia. The branchiae and ciliated ctenidia thus form a ciliated groove along the laterodorsal parts of the body (fig. 10c). Also in these burrowing forms, the body is prismatic or tetrahedral in cross section, the paired ventral longi- tudinal muscles are well developed, forming a somewhat solelike ventral surface, the dorsal surface slightly arched. Parapodia biramous, projecting laterally. Notopodia and neuro- podia equally well developed, the notosetae forming a fanlike spreading bundle and curving dorsally. Notosetae simple, slender, tapering, spinous; neurosetae both simple and compound or all compound. With paired ventral cirri on all segments and a pair of anal cirri. Prostomium suboval or subpentagonal, with usually 4 eyes (4, 2, or 0), 1 to 3 antennae, a pair of smooth ventral palps. Parapodial lobes of first or tentacular segment project anteriorly and dorsal to palps, more or less fused to anterior border of prostomium, with or without setae, with 2 pairs tentacular cirri (sometimes, in addition, lateral antennae of prostomium are fused basally to inner sides of tentacular segment). Muscular proboscis eversible, with a border of marginal papillae and four interlocking chitinous jaws. Carnivorous. 46 U.S. NATIONAL If?SEUM BULLETIN 227 Key to the New England Genera of Sigalionidae 1. Without cirriform branchiae. Prostomium and tentacular segment with a single median antenna, 2 pairs similar tentacular cirri, a pair of rather short subulate palps, without setae (fig. 10/) Pholo? (p. 46) With cirriform branchiae on all segments except some anterior ones (fig. 10c). Prostomium with 1-3 antennae, a pair of long palps; tentacular segment with 2 pairs tentacular cirri, with numerous fine simple setae (fig. 11a) . . 2 2. Prostomium without a median antenna, with 2 small lateral antennae inserted anteriorly on prostomium (fig. 11a). Elytra with fringe of pinnately- branched papillae on external border (fig. 116) Sigalion (p. 48) Prostomium with a median antenna (fig. 10&); lateral antennae free only at tips, fused proximally to inner dorsal part of parapodiat lobes of first or tentacular segment. Elytra with external border smooth or with simple fringe of papillae 3 3. Neurosetae of several kinds, some of which are compound, with terminal blades with bifid hooked tips (compound falcigers, fig, lO?). Sthenelais (p. 49) Most of neurosetae compound, with terminal blades with tips tapering, pointed (compound spinigers, fig. lOe) ; without compound falcigers. Leanira (p. 51) Genus Pholo? Johnston, 1839 Tjrpe (monotypy) : Pholo? inomaia Johnston, 1839 ; ^Pholo? minuta Fabricius, 1780). Contains only one New England species. Pholo? minuta (Fabricius, 1780) FIGURE 10,/-S' Pholo? minuta Verrill, 1881, pp. 290, 295, 303, 307, 311, 314, pi. 7, fig. 4,?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 701: 1887, p. 709.-?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 83.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 120, fig. 44,a~fe.~Procter, 1933, p. 136.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 12, fig. 3a.?Miner, 1950, p. 311, pi. 101.-Pratt, 1951, p. 328.?Pettibone, 1953, p. 77, pi. 39; 1954, p. 230, fig. 26/; 1956a, p. 552.?Newell, 1954, p. 333.? Usehakov, 1955, p. 165, fig. 44.?Southward, 1956, p. 258.?Stickney, 1?59, p. 15.?Clark, 1960, p. 15.?Day, 1960, p. 288.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1961, p. 656.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1962, p. 34.?Eliason, 1962, p. 229. DESCKIPTION.-?Length up to 25 mm., width including setae up to 4 mm., segments 36-84. Body small, elongate, nearly linear, flat- tened dorsoventrally, fragmenting easily. Ventral surface and para- podial lobes with short papillae, usually covered with debris. Elytra numerous pairs, on all segments from segment 23 on, covering the dorsum except for a narrow middorsal part; elytral surface smooth, with few somewhat moniliform papillae on posterior border. Prosto- mium small, suboval, with 2 pairs large eyes, each pair closely ap- proximated on each side, with single short subulate median antenna. Tentacular parapodial lobes with 2 pairs tentacular cirri similar to median antenna, without setae. A digitiform facial tubercle on a rounded lobe dorsal to mouth and ventral to prostomium (may be somewhat withdrawn). Notosetae simple, slender, curved to strongly POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 47 ?-elph FIGURE 10.?Sigalionidae, a-d, Slhenelais boa: a, dorsal view anterior end; h, prostomium; f, parapodium; d, neuroseta (compound falciger, with bifid tip), e, Leanira ttiragona, neuroseta (compound spiniger), /-g, Pkolo? minuta: f, dorsal view anterior end, elytra removed; g, elytron. angled. Neurosetae stouter, compound, with terminal blade short, hooked, entire. Color: without color or greenish gray, variegated brownish and black. BIOLOGY.-?In contrast to the other representatives of the family, it is not a burrowing form but is found under rocks, in crevices, among oysters, mussels, in holdfasts of algae (as Laminaria), in encrusting algae, etc. Dredged on various types of bottoms as stones, mud, and various combinations of mud, sand, gravel, stones, rocks, with shells, bryozoans, hydroids, mussels, worm tubes. According to Thorson (1946, p. 49), the species may reproduce all the year round and have a nonpelagic development. 48 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Specimens from off Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, New Brunswick, Maine, New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Long Island Sound, in low water to 120 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Norway to France, Labrador to Long Island Sound, Bering Sea to central California, Chile, north Japan Sea, off South Africa. In low water to 1,254 fathoms. C^nus Sigalion (Aiidouin and Milne-Edwards, MS.) Cuvier, 1830 Type (designated by Hartman, 1959a, p. 118): Sif/alion matkildae (Audouin and Milne-Edwards, Ms.) Cuvier, 1830. Contains only one New England species. Sigalion arenicola Verrill, 1879 FIGURE ll,a,i> Sigalion arenicola Verrill, 1879, p. 167; 1881, pp. 319, 320, pi. 7, fig. 5.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 701.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 619.? Hartman, 1942b, p. 34, fig. 44.?Miner, 1950, p. 311, pi. 101. DESCRIPTION.^?Length up to 300 mm., width including setae up to 8 mm., segments up to 300. Body elongated, squarish in cross sec- tion, tapered posteriorly. One of the paired anal cirri often very long and threadlike, the other short. Elytra numerous pairs, on all segments from segment 27 on, large, thin, transparent, subrectangu- lar, smooth, without tubercles, with 8-13 pinnately branched papillae on lateral margin (2-8 pinnae on each side plus a few short filaments along the base; fig. ll?). Prostomium subpentagonal, with 4 small eyes arranged in rectangle near middle, with 2 small lateral antennae on anterior side, without median antenna. Para- podial lobes of tentacular segment project anteriorly, lateral and dorsal to bases of the long slender palps, fused to anterior side of prostomium, with 2 pairs subequal tentacular cirri and numerous setae. A small pair of dorsal cirri on segment 3. Cirriform branchiae on all segments beginning with segment 5; with 3 parapodial ctenidia above the notopodium. Biramous parapodia with lobes well sepa- rated; noto podium club shaped, with single digitiform process or stylode on dorsoanterior side; neuropodium somewhat bilobed, upper part (with aciculum) longer, with 2 short rounded stylodes on pos- terior side of neuropodium (the upper one longer, the lower one shorter, almost disappearing in more posterior segments). Notosetae long, delicate, flowing, curving inward over dorsum, simple, tapering to capillary tips. Neurosetae of several kinds (see pi. 7, fig. 5, in Verrill, 1881) : Upper few simple, bipinnate, with acute PART 1 49 tips; rest compound, some having short terminal blades with bifid hooked tips and with shafts strongly to faintly spinous distally; others having long, pseudoarticulated terminal blades with bifid hooked tips and with distal part of shafts spinous, ringed, or smooth. Color: deUcate flesh color, translucent. BIOLOGY.?Found intertidaliy burrowing in loose sand, gravelly sand, muddy sand, and clay. Dredged on bottoms of sand with shell fragments and stones. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts (Cape Cod, Provincetown, Truro, Wellfleet, Bariistable; Nobska, Woods Hole; Edgartown, Martha's Vineyard), Connecticut, Long Island Sound, Georgia (Sapelo Island), in low water to 19 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Cape Cod) to Georgia. In low water to 20 fathoms. Genus Sthenelais Kinbcrg, 1855 Type (monotypy) : Sthendais helenae Kinberg, 1855. Both species burrowing forms, with the body prismatic in cross section, flattened ventrally, convex dorsally, tapering gradually posteriorly. Without dorsal cirri on segment 3, with 2 medium long anal cirri, with ventral cirri about the length of the neuropodia. Elytra numerous pairs, imbricated, covering the dorsum. Pro- stomium suboval, with rounded cihated nuchal organs at posterior angles. Four eyes arranged in square near the base of the median antenna, the anterior pair partly hidden. Median antenna with stout ceratophore which has a pair of antennal ctenidia attached basally and flaring distally (fig. 10&); style of median antenna rather long, tapering, smooth; paired palps very long, tapering, smooth. Tentacular segment with dorsal pair tentacular cirri about same length as median antenna and a shorter ventral pair, with numerous fine setae; with a pair of smaU prostomial lateral antennae fused basally to the inner dorsal part; with a pair of medial buccal ctenidia composed of a foliaceous plate medial to the tentacular cirri and forming a short delicate sheath or sleeve around the base of the palps. Cirriform branchiae begin on segment 4; with parapodial ctenidia in groups of 3 in the concave area above the notopodia (fig. 10c). Noto- podia with fringe of short to long papillae (parapodial stylodes), with numerous setae curving dorsally; notosetae simple, capillary, finely spinous. Neuropodia with conical acicular lobes surrounded by para- podial bracts with fringes of papillae. Neurosetae of several kinds: (1) Upper group of few setae simple, spirafly spinulate, tapering to fine tips; (2) a horseshoe-shaped middle group of compound setae around the acicular lobe, some or all of which have the terminal blades short and bifid hooked (compound 50 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 falcigers, fig. lOd); (3) a group of compound setae arranged anterior and ventral to group (2), with slender shafts, with terminal blades long, slender, sometimes pseudoarticulated, with fine bifid hooked tips. Key to the New England Species of Sthenelais 1. Anterior elytra with simple and bifid fringe on external border (fig. lie); middle (after segment 12 or so) and posterior elytra without fringe but with a deep notch on the external side (fig. lid) ; elytra thin, translucent, delicate, smootli, without microtubercles. Parapodial atylodeg (fingerlike fringe of pa- pillae on parapodial tips) of anterior segments long and prominent (fig. lie). Middle group of neurosetae composed of only a few compound falcigers with terminal blades short and with bifid hooked tips ; most consist of compound neurosetae with terminal blades tapering to pointed tips, with blades long to short (compound spinigers; longer blades may be pseudoarticulated). S. limicola All elytra with simple fringe on external border, elytra thicker, opaque, with microtubercles. Parapodial stylodes short. Middle group of neurosetae composed of numerous stout compound falcigers, with terminal blades short and with bifid hooked tips (fig. lOd) S. boa Sthenelais boa (Johnston, 1833) FIGURE 10,a-ci Sthenelais pida Verrill, 1881, pp. 291, 300, 317, 320, 321, p!. 6, fig, 7, pi. 7, fig. 3.? Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 701.?Wilson, 1900, p. 351.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 618. Slhenelais boa Fauvel, 1923, p. 110, fig. 41,a-?; 1933, p. 13; 1953, p. 61, fig. 28,a~k; 1957a, p. 4.?Monro, 1933a, p. 246, fig. 1.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1949, p. 257.? Day, 1953, p. 406; 1960, p. 289.?Tebble, 1955, p. 76.?Renaud, 1956, p. 6, fig. 4.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 37.?Fauvel and RuUier, 1959, p. 503.? Clark, 1960, p. 14. Sthenelais leidyi Hartman, 1942b, p. 30, figs. 36-39; 1945, p. 10; 1959a, p. 120.? Pratt, 1951, p. 328.?Costello, et al., 1957, p. 98. Sthenelais ariiculata Hartman, 1951, p. 20. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 200 mm., width including setae up to 6 mm., segments up to 200 or more. Elytra subreniform or broadly- lunate, with a deep emargination in center of anterior border. Com- plete surface of anterior few elytra covered with microtubercles (small rounded, slightly obtuse); on more posterior elytra, microtubercles confined to anterior part and along lateral border. Color: elytra variable in color, mottled greyish on inner part, forming a wide mid- dorsal longitudinal band; irregularly mottled grejash on most of elytra with darker brown on middorsal part; mottled with darker bands on posterior and inner borders of elytra; sometimes with rusty extraneous material on elytra and setae. BIOLOGY.?A rather sluggish form but can burrow with rapidity. Found intertidally in sand, muddy sand, and in sand with gravel. Dredged on silty sand and shelly bottom. Ripe individuals found POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 51 during the middle and latter part of August in Massachusetts (Woods Hole region, Bumpus, 1898b). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts (Cape Cod, Vineyard Sound, off Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket Sound), Rhode Island, Long Island Sound, North Carolina, Georgia, Louisiana, Florida, in low water to 9 fathoms. DiSTEiBUTiON.?Massachusetts (Cape Cod) to Brazil, Gulf of Mexico from Florida to Texas, Norway to Mediterranean, Adriatic, Iranian Gulf, Red Sea, Indian Ocean, Japan, China, off west and south Africa. In low water to 80 fathoms, Sthenelais limicola (Ehlers, 1864) ( FIGURE ll,c-e Sthenelais gracilis Verrill, 1879, p. 166.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 619.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 28, figs. 32-35; 1959a, p. 120. Sthenelais emerloni Verrill, 1879, p. 166; 1881, pp. 314, 319, 320, pi. 7, figs. 1, 2.? Miner, 1950, p. 310, pi. 101. Sthenelais limicola Whiteaves, 1901, p. 84.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 113, fig. 42,o-?7.? Treadwell, 1948, p. 13, fig. 36.?Miner, 1950, p. 310, pi. 101.?Tebble, 1955, p. 76.?Clark, 1960, p. 14.?Day, 19G0, p. 289.?Eliason, 1962, p. 229. DESCKIPTION.?Length up to 100 mm., width including setae up to 4 mm., segments up to 200 or more. Color; elytra translucent, colorless. BIOLOGY.?Found at low water on sandy bottom (Kittery, Maine). Dredged on sandy and muddy bottoms. Tossed on the shore in large numbers during storms and eaten by cod and flounders (Meintosh, 1900). Found in stomach of haddock (Georges Bank, April 1953, R. Wigley). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Maine (Sea Point near Kittery, low water), Massachusetts (Quisset, Gloucester, ? Georges Bank), Connecticut (Noank), Rhode Island (Newport), Long Island Sound (Fishers Island), North Carolina, in low water to 42 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Gulf of St. Lawrence to North Carolina, Norway to Mediterranean, Adriatic, West and South Africa. Low water to 420 fathoms. Genus Leanira Kinberg, 1855 Type (monotypy): Leanira qiiatrefagesi Kinberg, 1S55. Both species are burrowing forms, similar in shape to Sthenelais. Elytra numerous pairs, thin, translucent, smooth, without tubercles. Palps and tentacular segment as in Sthenelais. Notopodia with fringe of cirriform papillae (parapodial stylodes), with numerous setae curv- ing dorsaUy; notosetae simple, capillary, finely spinous. Neuropodia also with parapodial stylodes; neurosetae mostly compound, with 52 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 11.?Sigalionidae, a-h, Sigalion arenicola: a, dorsal view prostomium and tentacular segment; b, elytron, c-e, Slhenelais limieola: c, left anterior elytron; d, left middle elytron; e, anterior parapodium, posterior view. /, Leanira hysiricis, prostomlum and tentacular segment (only bases of palps shown). stems smooth or somewhat spiny, with terminal blades subulate, transversely canaliculated, tapering to delicate attenuated tips (com- pound spinigers, fig. lOe); may be few additional simple, spinous, pointed ncurosctae (easily overlooked). Key to the New England Species of Leanira 1. With pair of long dorsal cirri on segment 3 (extending to about tips of setae). Elytra with fringe of delicate papillae on lateral borders. Median antenna ?with pair of auricular ctenidia on ceratophore; style long and slender. L. tetragona POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 53 Without dorsal cirri on segment 3. Elytra without lateral fringe; some of more posterior elytra may have shallow lateral incision. Median antenna without antennal ctenidia on short ceratophore; style short (about same length as prostomium;fig. 11/) L. hystricis Leanira tetr?gono (Oersted, I84'5a) FIGURE lOe Leanira ieiragona Verrill, 1881, pp. 304, 307.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 84.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 117, fig. 43,0-?.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 21.?Clark, 1960, p. 14.~ Eliason, 1962, p. 223. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 200 mm., width including setae up to 8 mm., segments up to 300 or more. Prostomium rounded, bilobed, without eyes. Cirriform branchiae begin on segment 6 (rudimentary- ones on 4, 5) ; with parapodial ctenidia in groups of 3 in the concave area above the notopodia. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, mud and sand, sand and stones, rocks, with red algae. A female with large yolky eggs in body was found in plankton {Grampus Station 10249, 42?37' N., 69?38' W., 125-0 fathoms, August 22, 1914). Found in stomach of haddock (Georges Bank, January 1954, R. Wigley). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Gulf of St. Lawrence (south of Anticosti Island), Gulf of Maine, Georges Bank, Massachusetts, to off Chesa- peake Bay, in 22 to 906 fathoms; also in plankton, 125-0 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Scattered records in the Arctic (Davis Strait, Sibe- rian Arctic). Also Gulf of St. Lawrence to off Chesapeake Bay, Iceland, Norway to Azores, Mediterranean, Adriatic. In 22 to 1,200 fathoms. Leanira hystricis Ehlers, 1875 FiGUBE 11/ Leanira robusta Verrill, 1885a, pi. 40, fig, 175; 1885b, p. 426.?Hartman, 1942c, p. 104, fig. 8a; 1944a, p. 337, pi. 14, fig. 10. Leanira alba Moore, 1910, p. 387, pi. 33, figs. 99-104. Leanira hystricis Fauvel, 1923, p. 118, fig. 43,/i-m.?Hartman, 1942c, p. 105.?? Miner, 1950, p. 312, pi. 102.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 21. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 100 mm. or more (largest specimens broken and incomplete), width including setae up to 9 mm., segments up to 60 or more. Prostomium rounded, without eyes (if present, deeply buried). Cirriform branchiae begin on about segments 21-27 (may be small rudimentary ones more anteriorly) ; parapodial ctenidia in the concave area above the notopodia form an almost continuous ciliated area. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts (Martha's Vineyard), off Rhode Island, north of Puerto Rico, oft' southern California (San Diego), in 100 to 646 fathoms. 54 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 DISTRIBUTION.?Off Massachusetts to north of Puerto Rico, Ice- land, Great Britain, Ireland, Azores, off Southern California. In 100 to 1,443 fathoms. Family Chrysopetalidae Body short or elongated, segments few or numerous. Prostomium distinct, with usually 3 antennae, 2 ventral palps, 4 eyes (0, 2, or 4). Tentacular segments more or less fused with prostomium, with 1 to 4 pairs tentacular cirri. Parapodia biramous; notosetae in lateral tufts, curving dorsally and .forming fan-shaped groups or transverse rows; notosetae simple, usually expanded to form paddlelike setae or paleae (exception: Dysponetm). Neurosetae compound. With dorsal and ventral cirri. Proboscis strongly muscular, usually provided with a pair of chitinous stylets. Contains only one New England genus. Genus Dysponetus Levinsen, 1879 Taphus Webster and Benedict, 1887; type (monotypy): Taphus hebes Webster and Benedict, 1887; ^ Dysponetus pygmaeus Levinsen, 1879. Type fmonotypy): Dysponetus pygmaeus Levinsen, 1879. Con- tains only one species. Dysponetus pygmaeus Levinsen, 1879 FiGUHB 12 Dysponetus pygmaeus Levinsen, 1879, p. 9, pi. 1, figs. 1-6.?Annenkova, 1935, p. 233; 1938, p. 138.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 64; 1953, p. 47.? Uschakov, 1955, p. 168, fig. 45. Taphus hebes Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 716, pi. 8, figs. 113-118. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 3 mm., width up to 1.5 mm., segments 11-15. Body minute, elongate ovate, widest in the middle, convex dorsally and ventrally. Prostomium may be sunk between the first pair of parapodia, oval, with 3 short elliptical antennae on anterior margin, a pair of short globular ventral palps, without eyes or a minute pair visible when living. Tentacular segment indistinct, with a pair of tentacular cirri just posterior to prostomium, similar to antennae. First 2 setigers with dorsal cirri and notosetae only. Parapodia distinctly biramous from setiger 3 on. Notopodia indistinct, with a radiating bundle of numerous notosetae emerging dorsoiaterally from body, curving dorsally and posteriorly. Notosetae dark brown- ish, simple, curved, transversely striated, with few stout scattered spines along convex margin (notosetae do not form expanded paleae as in other chrysopetalids). Dorsal cirri with bulbous cirrophores below the notosetae; styles rather thick, digitiform, extending about the length of the notosetae. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 55 dC (set 1,2) -/ FIGURE 12.?Chrysopetalidae, Dysponetus pygmaeus, dorsal view animal (drawn from type slide of Taphus hebes Webster and Benedict). Neuropodia short, conical; neurosetae little longer than notosetae, compound, with stem transversely striated ; blade quite long, delicate, with slightly curved tip. Ventral cirri short, conical. Anal segment prolonged into conical cirriform structure. Proboscis muscular, with 2 maxillary pieces in the form of stylets. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on sandy bottom. Found in holdfasts of Lamma?a. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Type of Taphus hebes from Eastport, Maine. DISTRIBUTION.?East and west Greenland, Spitsbergen, Maine fEastport), north Japan Sea. Low water to 28 fathoms. Family Amphinomidae Most species of the family tropical and subtropical. Some common in the littoral zones in the West Indies and occasional individuals carried to more northern regions by the Gulf Stream and other currents along the shore, for example Amphinome rostrata; others apparently confined to floating objects, as Hippono? gaudichaudi. A few species typically northern in range. The amphinomida commonly called "fire-worms," an allusion to the stinging sensation caused by touching 56 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 the specimens?a mechanical injury from penetration of numerous, fine, glassUke, harpoon-shaped setae, which are difficult to remove. Often brilliantly colored. Body short, flattened, fusiform, or moderately elongated, vermi- form, subcylindrical or sub quadrangular in cross section. Prostomium suboval, with 6 similar, short, subulate to filiform appendages (median antenna in middle, paired lateral antennae more anteriorly, paired palps more laterally), usually with eyes (0, 2, or 4). Usually with characteristic prostomial caruncle or crest, a posterior extension of the prostomium with ciliated bands; caruncle may be absent or very primitive, small cordiform, simple sinuous ridge extending over several segments (fig. 13c), or exceedingly elaborate with more or less convoluted dorsal and ventral lobes. Parapodia biramous, cylindrical, with rami well separated. Setae simple, some capillary, spear shaped, harpoon shaped, bifurcated (with basal spur), or hooked; setae sometimes hollow and filled with a poisonous jelly. Dorsal cirri posterior to notosetae; ventral cirri ventral and posterior to neurosctae. Branchiae paired, branched (arborescent or pinnate), posterior to bases of notopodia, continued along length of body or confined to the anterior region. Mouth ven- tral, surrounded by first few setigers. Anus terminal or subterminal, covered by median oval papilla or with two short anal cirri. Pro- boscis eversible, short, globular to cylindrical, lacking papillae and jaws. Predaceous, sluggish in movement, crawling around on rocks, in crevices, among corals, concealing themselves in retreats which they rarely leave; some found on floating timber, algae, debris, etc. Key to the New England Genera of Amphinomidae 1. Body flattened, fusiform, short (up to 30 segments). Neuropodia ventral in position, with few stout bifid hooked, clinging setae; ventral cirri reduced to short cushions ventral to neurosetae (fig. 136) . . . . Hippono? (p. 57) Body subcylindrical or subrectangular in cross section, slightly tapered to- ward both ends, moderately elongate. Neuropodia lateral in position; ventral cirri short, subulate (fig. 13c) 2 2. Body subrectangular in cross section. Neuropodium with few, stout, hooked setae (fig. 13e). Prostomial caruncle cordiform, extending on first setiger (fig. 13ti) Amphinome (p. 59) Body subcylindrical in cross section. Neuropodium without hooked setae. Prostomial caruncle absent or otherwise 3 3. Branchiae begin on setiger 2, continuing posteriorly. Without hooked setae in notopodia of first setiger. Prostomial caruncle a simple sinuous crest extending on first 3 setigers (fig. 13c) Pareurytho? (p. 60) Branchiae begin on setigers 3 or 4, confined to anterior part of body. With 2 hooked setae in notopodia of first setiger. Prostomial caruncle absent or poorly developed Paramphinome (p. 61) POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 57 Genus Ilippono? Audouin and Milne-Edwards, 1830 Metamphinome Treadwell, 1940; type (monotypy) : Metamphinome multibranchiata Treadwell, 1940; ?H. gatidichaudi Audouin and Milne-Edwards, 1830. Type (monotypy): Hippono? gaudichavdi Audouin and Milne- Edwards, 1830. Contains only one New England species. Hippono? gaudichaudi Audouin and Milne-Edwards, 1830 FIGURE 13,a,6 Hippono? gaudichaudi Moore, 1903b, p. 793.?Willey, 1910, p. 180,?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 619.?Augener, 1922, p. 39.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 132, fig. 47,;-p; 1936b, p. 19.?St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 15.?Okuda, 1950, p. 49, figs. a-b.?Fauvei and Rullier, 1959, p. 510. Hippono? multibranchiata Hartman, 1951, p. 29, pi. 8, figs. 1-2, DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 42 mm,, width up to 10 mm., seg- ments 25-32. Prostomium small, suboval, with 4 subequal eyes ar- ranged in rectangle (rarely missing?), with 5 filiform appendages? subequal paired lateral antennae and lateral palps; median antenna longer (fig. 13a). Without prostomial caruncle. Branchiae arbores- cent, richly branched, beginning on setigcr 3 and continuing pos- teriorly. Dorsal cirri digitiform, nearly as long as notosetae. Ventral cirri reduced to short cushions ventral to neurosetae. Notopodia dorsolateral in position, with fan-shaped bundle of slender, fine noto- setae (fig. 13a). Neuropodia ventral in position about midway be- tween midventral line and lateral side, with circular rim within which are a group of short, stout, bifid hooked neurosetae (with long terminal book and shorter one beneath, fig. 13i>). Color, in life: deep orange to vermilion rod. BIOLOGY.?Floating objects apparently the nonnal habitat of the species. Found clinging to logs or floating objects bearing masses of goose or stalked barnacles (as Lepas anatifera Linn?, L. fascicularis Ellis and Solandcr, L.f. aurivillii Nilsson-Cantell, L, pectinata Spenglo, L. aTidifera Linn?) upon which they feed. According to Moore (1903b), they are found on the under side of logs away from the light, asso- ciated with crabs and nudibranchs, and less frequently on the sides and upper surfaces of barnacles. Cling most tenaciously by means of their strong neuropodial hooks and move very sluggishly. Found within the valves of Lepas. Okuda (1950) recorded a female distended with ova, living commensally within the branchial chamber of Lepas. Sexually mature individuals taken in the summer in the Woods Hole area (Sumner, 1913). They have a rich uniform pinkish coloration resembling the color of the egg ribbons of the Lepas (Willey, 1910). Young remain attached to the lateral and ventral sides of the female? at one time considered to be parasites (Augener, 1922). Specimens 58 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 noS, FIGURE 13.?Amphinomidae, a-b, Hippono? ga-udichaudi: a, dorsal view anterior end; i, ventral view posterior end. c, Pareurytho'e borealis, dorsal view anterior end. d-e,Am- pkinome rostrata (after Hartman, 1951 and Fauvel, 1923): d, dorsal view anterior end; e, parapodiura. f-g, Paramphinome fukhella (after Gustafson, 1930): /, notosetae; g, neurosetae. with young attached to the body found in the North Pacific in April and May (D. Henry, collector). MATEHIAL EXAMINED.?North Atlantic {Albatross Station 1655, Gulf Stream, surface, with young attached laterally to female), North Pacific (off southern Cahfornia, 30?50' N., 121?35' W., May 29, 1954, in Lepas Jasdcvlaris aurivillii, with young; 28?40' N., POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 59 129?35' W,, June 1955, larger and smaller specimens in L. anatijera; 27?56' N., 129?35' W., April 23,1954, in L. anatifera and L.J. awrmllii, with young; 26?12' N., 118?27' W., August 24, 1954, in L.J. auriv?lii, barnacles from Scripps material, collected by M. Johnson, identified by D. Henry). DISTRIBUTION.?Cosmopolitan, on floating objects: North Atlantic (Massachusetts, Florida, near Bermuda, West Indies, Gulf of Mexico, S.W. Ireland, Madeira, France), Mediterranean, South Atlantic (St. Helena, West Africa), North Pacific (Japan, off southern Califor- nia), South Pacific (Port Jackson, Australia), Indian Ocean (Ceylon). Genus Amphinonie Brugui?re, 1789 Type (designated by Baird, 1870) : AmpMnome tetraedra Brugui?re, 1789; =A. rostrata (Pallas, 1766). Contains only one New England species, Amphinome rostrata (Pallas, 1766) FiGTiBE 13,d,e ? Amphinome lepadis Verrill, 1885b, p. 427.?Hartman, 1944a, p. 337, pi. 23, fig. S- Amphinome pallasii Wilson, 1910, p. 351.?Moore, 1903b, p. 793.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 127, fig. 46. Amphinome rostrata Willey, 1910, p. 180.?Augener, 1922, p. 39.?Okuda, 1938, p. 78.?Hartman, 1951, p. 22, pi. 4, fig. 1.?Day, 1953, p. 408.?Fauvel, 1955, p. 81, fig. 37.?Ilioja, 1958, p. 223. DESCEIPTION.?Length up to 400 mm., width up to 30 mm., seg- ments 49-66. Prostomium wedged between setigerous lobes of first segment, small, rounded, may be slightly bilobed anteriorly, with 5 subequal short subulate appendages (median antenna in middle, lateral antennae anteriorly, palps lateroventral), with 2 eyes (?). Prostomial caruncle small, cordiform, just posterior to median antenna and extending on first setiger. Paired branchiae large, bushy, arborescent, branching dicotymously many times, beginning on setiger 3 (or setiger 2) and continuing posteriorly. Dorsal cirri digiti- forni, ventral cirri short, subulate. Some notosetae with fine capillary tips, others harpoon shaped. Neurosetae few in number (5-7), short, stout, hoolted. Anus large circular opening embracing several seg- ments. Color, in life: body bluish brown or bluish grey; cirri and branchiae deep brown or red with orange tips. BIOLOGY.?The species is a common annelid in the littoral zone of the West Indies. Found on floating logs, driftwood and other debris, associated with stalked or goose barnacles, as Lepas anatifera, upon which the worm feeds. Coloration suggests a protective resemblance to the stalks of the barnacles to which it clings. Observed squeezing between the valves of the barnacles and feeding on the soft parts (Moore, 1903b). Observed continually crawling in and out of Teredo 569-457?63 5 60 ?.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETTN 227 burrows (Verrill, 1885b). Also found on floating cuttlebone in company with Lepas and small gastropods, on fronds of algae, as the gulfweed Sargassum. Thus should be considered a tropical form that becomes a Gulf Stream pelagic waif. Occasionally dredged. Females show brood care, the young attached to the adult. Worm 90 mm. long found with 20 young on its body, ranging in length from 3 to 10 mm. (Augener, 1922). On a specimen (in the U.S. National Museum) from off the Philippine Islands found on driftwood, young specimens were wrapped around the parapodia near the branchiae?^large enough to resemble the adult. Young immature specimens have been found on floating objects. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?North Atlantic (Nantucket Sound, off Falmouth Heights, Massachusetts, 5 fathoms, June 18, 1950, J. Rankin; Vineyard Sound near Lucas shoal, among Lepas on log, September 4, 1959, M. Gray; Albatross Station 2566, 37?23' N., 68?08' W., surface, in wood, August 29, 18S5; Albatross Station 1655, Gulf Stream, surface). DISTRIBUTION.?Cosmopolitan and widespread in tropical zones of the Indian, Pacific, and Atlantic Oceans. Carried by floating objects to North Atlantic (Gulf of Mexico, Florida, Bermuda, North Carolina, Massachusetts), South Atlantic (South Africa), North Pacific (China Sea, Japan), Indian Ocean (Ceylon). Intertidal to 112 fathoms; surface. Genus Pareurytho? Custafsou, 1930 Tjrpe (designated by Hartman, 1959a): Pareurytho? jap?nica Gustafson, 1930. Contains only one New England species. Pareurytho? borealis (Sars, 1862) FIGURE 13C Eurytho? borealis Fauvel, 1923, p. 129, fig. 46,ft-?. Pareurytho? borealis Okuda, 1938, p. 78, figs. 1-2. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 44 mm., width up to 3 mm., segments 23-77. Prostomium with convex quadrate area with median antenna and four eyes arranged in rectangle, the anterior pair larger; with semilunar buccal cushion anteriorly, bearing paired lateral antennae anterior to the eyes and paired palps laterally; the 5 prostomial appendages short, subulate, subequal. Prostomial caruncle extending from posterior part of prostomium on firsb 3 setigers, a simple, smooth, linear, smooth crest (fig. 13c). Ventral mouth surrounded by pro- stomial cushion and first 3 setigers. Anus terminal, with median oval lobe. Paired branchiae with few digitiform filaments (3-5), beginning on setiger 2 and continuing posteriorly. Dorsal and ventral cirri jointed basally. Notosetae cap?lary, harpoonlike, and bifurcated. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 61 Neurosetae bifurcated, spinous. Color, in life: pale j'^ellow to pale vermilion ; red dorsal blood vessel. BIOLOGY.?In parts of its range, found under stones, in tide pools in the shelly sand. Dredged on bottoms of shelly sand, sand and pebbles, mud and gravel. Kolls in a spiral when disturbed. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?North Atlantic off Chesapeake Bay (Alba- tross Station 2265, 37?07' N., 74?35' W., 70 fathoms, mud and gravel, 1884; Albatross Station 2421, 37?07' N., 74?34' W,, 64 fathoms, sand and pebbles, 1885). DISTRIBUTION.?Norway, North Sea, English Channel, Medi- terranean, North Atlantic off Chesapeake Bay, Japan. Low water to 70 fathoms. Genus Paramphinome (M. Sara, MS.) G. O. Sars, 1872 Type (monotypy): Paramphinome pulchella (M. Bars, MS.) G. O. Sars, 1872. Contains only one New England species. Paramphinome pulchella (M. Sars) G. O. Sars, 1872 FIGURE 13, f,g Paramphinome pulchella G. O. Sars, 1872, p. 45, pi. 4, figs. 19-35.?Mclntosh, 1900, p. 222, fig. 15.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 23.?Eliason, 1962, p. 230. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 15 mm,, width up to 1.5 mm., segments 24-42. Prostomium suboval, with a convex oval area with the median antenna in the center and extending posteriorly on the first segment (this posterior extension is considered to be a very primitive type of caruncle), with a semilunar buccal cushion anteriorly bearing the paired lateral antennae and palps; the 5 prostomial appendages are short, cylindrical, and subequal; without eyes. Ventral mouth sur- rounded by large rounded prostomial buccal cushion and first 2 setigers. Proboscis eversible, sac-like. Anus terminal, with median oval lobe. Branchiae wide, fanlike, placed transversely, branched dicotymously 2-4 times, beginning on setiger 4 (or 3) and continuing on 4 to 12 segments, leaving the greater part of the body without branchiae. Dorsal cirri longer on first and last few setigers, others much shorter; ventral cirri longer on first setiger, rest short. Notopodia of first setiger each with a strong hook projecting forward. Rest of noto- setae fine capulary and thornlike. Neurosetae fine, capillary, with or without short spurs; few are shorter, strongly serrated, with strong basal spur. Color in life: white, transparent. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of soft mud, silt, very fine to coarse sand and clay. Found in sponge (Florida) and in the stomach of haddock (Georges Bank, June 1954, R. Wigley). When irritated, rolls 62 TJ.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 up in a ball, the long diverging notosetae sticking out in all directions, then straightens out slowly. Moves with a sluggish snakelike motion. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Maine (U.S. Fish Commission Station 66, Gulf of Maine, 65 fathoms, 1874; Station 16b, Jeffrey's Bank, 79 fathoms, 1873; Bache Station 3b, 8 miles south of Monhegan Island, 43?38' N., 69?17' W., 64 fathoms), Massachusetts {Albatross Station 2091, 40?01' N., 70?59' W., 117 fathoms; Georges Bank, 44-191 fathoms), Florida (Seahorse Key, September 1960, T. Hopkins). DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed along west coast of Norway and Sweden, Denmark, Iceland, Shetlands, Gulf of Maine to south of Long Island Sound, Gulf of Mexico (Florida). In 20 to 600 fathoms. Family Euphrosinidae ( = Euphrosynidae) Body short, elliptical, with few segments (less than 40). Ventnim flat, dorsum more or less convex and bristly, formed by elongated, ridgelike, transverse sefcigerous notopodia with numerous spinelike notosetae nearly covering the dorsum. Prostomium (fig. 14,a,6) wedged between anterior segments, narrow, elongated, folded over anterior end, thus partly dorsal and partly ventral; dorsal part with 2 eyes lateral to median antenna, with a crestlike nuchal oi'gan or caruncle extending posteriorly on some anterior segments and provided with longitudinal ciliated bands; ventral portion with 2 smaller eyes, two antennae lateral to eyes, a pair of large rounded, cushionlike palps just anterior to mouth; mouth surrounded by first 5 segments. Anal cirri a pair of short, oval, cushionlike lobes, surrounded by the posterior segments as seen ventrally (fig. 14c). Parapodia (fig. 14a) biramous, with rami crestlike and indistinct, only slightly projecting. Notopodium a wide transverse ridge with 2 short digitiform dorsal cirri, one on inner side of lobe (inner dorsal cirrus) and the other about the middle of the lobe (outer dorsal cirrus) ; with numerous spinelike notosetae in several transverse rows, usually with several branchiae in a single transverse row posterior to the notosetae. Notosetae brittle, hollow, bifurcated, with one branch shorter than the other (may be in the form of a short lateral spur, fig. 14e). Neuropodium with unequally bifurcated neurosetae and a ventral cirrus posterior to the setae. Includes creeping forms. When animal curls ventrallj', setae stick out, giving the animal the appearance of a bur or a little porcupine. Proboscis elongated, cylindrical, unarmed. Contains only one New England genus. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PABT 1 63 Genus Eiiphrosine (Savigny, MS.) Lamark, 1818 Type (designated by Hartman, 1959a) : Euphrosine myriosa (Savigny, MS.) Lamark, 1818. All 3 species have the dorsal part of the prostomium with a ridgelike caruncle extending to segment 5 and consisting of 3 longitudinal parallel lobes, the middorsal one nearly covering the lateral ones; with a median antenna shorter than the caruncle, consisting of a thickened oval basal portion and a slender process about as long as the basal part (terminal filament may get knocked off), with a pair of eyes lateral to the base of the antenna (fig. lib). Ventral part of prostomium with a pair of eyes closely approximated, a pair of very small antennae lateral to the eyes, with palps reduced to rounded cushions anterior and lateral to the ventral mouth (fig. 14a). Par- apodia biramous, with rami slightly distinct. Setae transparent white to tan. Key to the New England Species of Euphrosine 1. Notosetae of a single kind?all very unequally bifurcated, smootli, long, giving the dorsum a characteristic spiny aspect. Branchiae consisting of a single curled filament close to the upper dorsal cirrus (fig. 14^). E. clrrata (p. 63) Notosetae of 2 kinds: (1) Very unequally bifurcated, smooth; (2) unequally bifurcated, with branches longer, serrated on inner sides of branches (fig. 14c). Branchiae more numerous, branched, in a row posterior to the notosetae (fig. 14.d) 2 2. Branchiae usually with 2-4 branches (1-12), without terminal clusters of branchlets (fig. 14a). Bifurcated serrated notosetae with longer branch curved toward shorter branch (?g. Me). Notosetae much longer than branchiae, longest about same length as neurosetae, giving a shaggy appearance to dorsum E. borealis (p. 65) Branchiae with numerous branches, with terminal clusters of conical branch- lets. Bifurcated serrated notosetae with branches diverging (fig. 14/). Notosetae only slightly longer than branchiae, shorter than neurosetae, giving a neat, trim appearance to dorsum . . . . E. armadillo (p. 65) Euphrosine cirrata Sars, 1862 FIGURE Ug Euphrosyne cirrata Fauvel, 1936a, p. 14.?Monro, 1939, p. 94.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950a, p. 11, pi. 2, figs. 8, 9; 1953, p. 29. DESCRIPTION.?^Ijcngth up to 10 mm., width including setae up to 6 mm., segments about 20. Notopodium with a single curled filiform branchia close to the upper dorsal cirrus. About one-third of mid- dorsum uncovered, without notosetae. Notosetae all very unequally bifurcated, long, slender, longer than neurosetae, arranged in 3 rows of longer to shorter spines, giving a characteristic spiny aspect. 64 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 14.?Euphrosinidae, a-e, Euphrosine horealis: a, ventral view anterior end; b, dorsal view anterior end; (, ventral view posterior end; d, parapodiurn, posterior view; e, notosctae. /, Euphrosine armadillo, notoseta. g, Euphrosine cirrata, parapodiurn (after Wesenberg-Lund, 1950). BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of gravel, pebbles, boulders, and ooze. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Nova Scotia (U.S. Fish Commission Loca- tion 70, about 120 miles south of Halifax, 190 fathoms, 1877; Albatross III, 42?09' N., 65?59' W., 118 fathoms, 1955, K. Wigley; Delaware Station, 42?11' N., 65?30' W., 66 fathoms, 1959, R. Wigley). Mas- sachusetts {Albatross Station 2572, near Georges Bank, 40?29' N., POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 65 66?04' W., 1,769 fathoms, 1885). Off Chesapeake Bay (Albatross Station 2097, 37?56' N., 70?57' W., 1,917 fathoms, 1883). DISTRIBUTION.^?Greenland, Davis Strait, Norway, Iceland, Den- mark Strait, Nova Scotia to off Chesapeake Bay, Antarctic. In 66 to 1,917 fathoms. Euphrosine borealis Oersted 1843 FiGUBE 14,a-e Euphrosyne borealis Verrill, 1881, pp. 290, 303, 307, 314.?Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 708.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 88.?Treadwell, 1939a, p. 170, fig. 46,a- 6.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 155; 1938, p. 139.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1953, p. 29.? Uschakov, 1955, p. 224, fig. 71. Euphrosyne longisetis Treadwell, 1939a, p. 169, fig. 46,?-/. DESCEIPTION.?Length up to 25 mm., width including setae up to 15 mm., segments 24-31. Dorsum nearly covered with notosetae, with only a narrow bare middorsal region without setae, the upper tips of the notosetae often overlapping middorsally. Each noto- podium with usually 7 (6-8) branchiae, with 3 of them (rarely 2) between the inner and outer dorsal cirri. Branchiae dicotymously branched, usually 2-4 branches (1-12), the terminal filaments not knobbed or thickened. Notosetae of 2 kinds: (1) Longer spikelike smooth setae with short lateral spur, tapering to pointed or blunt tips (tips may be broken off), projecting far above the branchiae and giving a very hirsute aspect; (2) shorter unequally bifurcated serrated setae, the longer branch curved toward the shorter branch, with strongly marked serrations on inner sides. Neurosetae with tips somewhat hooked, with short lateral spur, about as long as longest notosetae. Colorless when preserved. BIOLOGY.?^Dredged on bottoms of mud, rocks, stones, sand and gravel, and gravel and stones. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Newfoundland, Gulf of St. Lawrence (Bay of Chaleurs), Nova Scotia, Gulf of Maine, Georges Bank, Mas- sachusetts Bay, in 20 to 127 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Norway to Great Britain, Newfoundland, Gulf of St. La%vrence to Massachusetts (Massachusetts Bay), north Japan Sea. In 5 to 753 fathoms. Euphrosine armadillo Sars, 1851 FIGURE 14/ Euphrosyne armadillo Fauve!, 1923, p. 137, fig, 49,0-5-?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950a, p. 12, pi. 2, figs. 10, 11; 1951, p. 24, Euphrosyne branckiata Treadwell, 1939a, p. 170, fig. 46,c-/- DESCBIPTION.?Length up to 10 mm., width including setae up to 4 mm., segments 19-21 (up to 30, Fauvel). About a third of mid- 66 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 dorsum bare, \vithout setae. Each notopodium with 5-6 branchiae, with 2 of them between the inner and outer dorsal cirri; branchiae branched dicotymously several times, the tips with clusters of conical branchlets. Notosetae extending only slightly beyond the branchiae, shorter than the neurosetae, of 2 kinds: (1) Smooth pointed spines with much shorter lateral branch; (2) unequally bifurcated setae with branches arched, divergent, with strongly marked serrations on inner sides (fig. 14/). Neurosetae with curved hooked tips, with a strong lateral spur; some with an additional slender subterminal tooth. Colorless when preserved; brick red to pale yellowish in life. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of fine sand, shelly sand, sandy mud, sandy mud and corals, and mud and gravel. Some specimens were filled with large yolky eggs (October 18, 1894, 70 fathoms, off Chesapeake Bay). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts {Albatross III, 40?31' N., 67?19' W., 79 fathoms, 1955, R. Wigley), off Chesapeake Bay (Alba- tross Station 2265, 37?07' N., 74?35' W., 70 fathoms, 1884;'Station 2421, 37?07' N., 74?34' W., 64 fathoms, 1885). DISTRIBUTION.?Iceland, Norway, Faroes to France, off Massa- chusetts to off Chesapeake Bay. In 64 to 289 fathoms. Family Spintheridae A family represented by a single genus in which all known species are clinging forms, associated with or parasitic on sponges, which they tend to match in coloration. Body oval, convex dorsally, flattened ventrally, solelike, with ventral surface papillated or smooth. Para- podia biramous. Neuropodia cylindrical, each with 1 to several, strong yellow, compound, strongly hooked neurosetae. Notopodia forming elongated transverse ridges nearly covering the dorsum except for a narrow middorsal area, with more or less developed delicate lamellae supported by numerous spinelike notosetae in trans- verse rows, giving the animal the appearance of an oval pincushion. Anterior parapodia directed anteriorly and fused medially, forming thus a continuous disc. Posterior parapodia smaller, directed posteriorly, radiating around the subterminal anus. Mouth ventral, surrounded by first few setigers. Proboscis unarmed, eversible, forming a voluminous rosettelike sac. Prostomium tiny, inconspicu- ous, posterior to the anterior fused parapodia, with a globular median antenna which nearly covers the prostomium, usually with 2 pairs of eyes at the base of the antenna. Without branchiae, dorsal or ventral cirri (in some species, the neuropodia have distal digitiform extensions which have been refeiTed to as ventral or parapodial cirri). Carnivorous or parasitic, living on sponges. Contains only one genua. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 (renus Spinther Johnston, 1845 67 Type (monotypy): Spinther oniscoides Johnston, 1845. Contains only one New England species. Spinther citrinus (StLmpson, 1354) FIGURE 15 Spinther citrinus Verrill, 1881, pp. 290, 303, 307.?Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 707.~Whiteaves, 1901, p. 87.?Treadwell, 1937, p. 25.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 41; 1951, p. 24. Spinther oniscoides Annenkova, 1938, p. 139.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 35, figs. 45-46.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 10, fig. l,c-rf.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 107.?Not Johnston, 1845. Spinther citrina Hartman, 1948, p. 16. DESCBIPTION.?Length up to 28 mm., width up to 16 mm., segments 30^8. Ventral surface with numerous scattered globular papillae in midventral area and in lateral rows radiating to each neuropodium. Prostomium in clear area about the anterior fourth of dorsum, covered by an oval median antenna, at the base of which are 2 pairs of eyes. Transverse notopodial ridges nearl}^ covering the dorsum, radiating anteriorly and posteriorly, with delicate lamellae, with numerous noS _noS ?ne FIGURE IS.?Spintheridae, Spinther citrinus: a, dorsal view anterior end; h, ventral view anterior end. 68 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 22 7 DOtosetae in somewhat irregular double rows in each notopodium. Notosetae mostly spinelike, with entire pointed tips; few with terminal bifid tips; some more slender with tips entire or bifid. Neuropodia cylindrical, flexible, with a prominent digitiform parapodial extension posterior to the hooked neurosetae, referred to as a parapodial cirrus. Neuropodia each with usually a single, stout, compound, strongly hooked neuroseta ; distal end of setal shaft diagonal, sometimes slightly crenulate on the inner hooked side. Color; lemon yellow, resembling the sponges with which they are found. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of gravel, rocks with mud and coral. They are associated with sponges, which they resemble in coloration. They are adapted to clinging tightly to the sponges. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Off Newfoundland, Gulf of St. Lawrence (south of Anticosti Island), Nova Scotia, Maine, New Hampshire, Massachusetts (off Cape Cod), in 23 to 120 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION,?West Greenland, Iceland, Faroes, Norway to English Channel, Canadian Arctic (Fox Basin) to Massachusetts (off Cape Cod), north Japan Sea. In 10 to 614 fathoms. Family Phyllodocidae Body usually elongated, vermiform, slender, with numerous seg- ments. Prostomium well developed, subconical, suboval or cordiform, usually provided with 2 eyes (0^), with 4 frontal antennae, with or without an odd median antenna, without palps. Anterior segments 1-3 modified, with 2-4 pairs of tentacular cirri. Parapodia uniramous (exceptionally subbiramous) ; setae compound (may be some additional simple setae), with terminal blades tapering to fine tips (compound spinigers, fig. 18c). Dorsal and ventral cirri flattened, enlarged, leaflike or more or less globular; dorsal cirri may be large, imbricated, more or less covering the dorsum (may resemble polynoids in this regard, fig. 176). Two anal cirri. Proboscis eversible, powerful, with terminal papillae; surface smooth or with soft papillae; without jaws (may have some internal jaws in proboscis). Carnivorous. Very active, moving about freely over surface and swimming; mucus secreted in quantities. Many lay their eggs in gelatinous masses, color of the eggs characteristically green. The larvae may have a long pelagic existence. Key to the New England Genera of Phyllodocidae 1. Tentacular cirri 2 pairs, short, on first achaetous segment (fig. 16a). Prosto- mium subtriangular, widest basally, anterior part rounded, with four frontal antennae Eteone (p. 69} Tentacular cirri 3 pairs, on first 2 segments (fig. 17c). Prostomium suboval, with 4 frontal antennae, without nuchal tubercle .... Mystides (p, 74) POLYCSAETE WORMS, PART 1 69 Tentacular cirri 4 pairs, on first 3 segments (first segment may be rudimentary or fused with second, not visible dorsally, figs. 17, a, 6; 18o) 2 2. Prostomium with four frontal antennae, without median antenna 3 Prostomium with a median antenna in addition to four frontal antennae (figs. 176, 19a). Prostomium suboval or subconical, without nuchal tubercle 4 3. First 2 segments fused, well developed, from which the first 3 pairs of tentacular cirri emerge (fig. 17-e.?Not Verrill, 1873a. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 100 mm., width up to 2.5 mm., segments up to 200, Basal portion of proboscis covered with crowded conical papillae, except for narrow bare middorsal area. Color, in life: body white or green with wide spindle-shaped transverse band near the intersegmental region, with central brown spot midventrally in each segment, with dorsal cirri with diffused brown pigment at its base and an additional brown spot on the outer central part; color, preserved: transversely banded, dorsal cirri spotted. In the original description of P. catenula Verrill, 1873, the localities given included: (1) Watch HiU, Khode Island, 4-6 fathoms, rocks, algae, tide pools; (2) Woods Hole, atsurface, evening, July3 (in USNM); (3) also very common in Bay of Fundy, low water to 50 fathoms. Two species are evidently included. The description and figures of P. catenula and evidently localities (1) and (3) are referable to P. mac?- lala (Linn?); the specimens from locality (2) were not used in the original description or figures by Verrill and are the same as P. arenae. BIOLOGY.?Found at low water in beaches of sand and muddy sand with rubble. Found swarming at the surface in June, July, and August (Eel Pond, Woods Hole, August 6, 1944, D. P. Costello; Fisheries Dock, Woods Hole, evening, July 26, 1951, June 8, and 11, 1954, M. Pettibone; Vineyard Sound, evening, July 3, 1871, A. E. Verrill). Active species, giving off a great deal of mucus when handled. Dredged on bottoms of sand, gravel and shells. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 83 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Maine (U.S. Fish Commission Station 360, 42?03' N., 69?22' W., 106 fathoms, 1879), Massachusetts (Georges Bank, 19-66 fathoms; Cape Cod, Provinceto\vn, Wellflcct Harbor, Orleans, Barnstable; Woods Hole region, Nantucket Sound, West Falmouth Harbor, Stony Beach, Nobska, Eel Pond, Woods Hole Harbor). DISTRIBUTION.?Off Maine to New Jersey. Low water to 106 fathoms; swarms at surface. Genus Notophyllum Oersted, 1843 Type (designated by Bergstr?m, 1914, p. 76): Notophyllum viride Oersted, 1843; =N. foliosum (M. Sars, 1835). Botli species have the body linear, slightly attenuated anteriorly and posteriorly, convex dorsally, flattened ventrally. Prostomium suboval, with 2 large eyes with lenses, with 4 short thick frontal antennae and a longer median antenna between the eyes. A pair of ciliated nuchal epaulettes posterior to prostomium, more or less lobu- lated (fig. 176). Tentacular cirri 4 pairs on 3 segments, 1 pair lateral to prostomium (first segment reduced dorsally), 2 pairs on segment 2, fourtli pair on segment 3 above the first normal ventral cirrus. Dorsal cirri large, about twice as wide as long, platelike, subreniform in shape, imbricated (superficially resembling polynoids). Ventral cirri large, oval, posterior to neuropodia. Parapodia subbiramous, notopodia represented by small acicular lobe with internal aciculum on lateral sides of cirrophores of dorsal cirri; with or without few simple capillary setae (fig. 17e). Neuropodia witli fanshaped group of compound setae; blades tapered to capillary tips. Key to the New England Species of Notophyllum 1. Paired nucha! epaulettes simple or bilobed. Dorsal cirri cover middorsum. N. foliosum Each of paired nuchal epaulettes consisting of 4-7 or so lobes (fig. 17b). Dorsal cirri leave narrow strip of middorsum uncovered. N. americanum Notophyllum foliosum (Sars, 1835) FIGURE 17e Notophylhtm foliosum Fauvel, 1923, p. 170, fig. lCi,i-e; 1933, p. 16.?Hartman, 1948, p. 18, fig. 3,?-/.?Wcscnbcrg-Lund, 1950a, p. 10, pi. 1, fig. 4.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 95.?Banse, 1959, p. 42(j.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 24.?Clark, 1900, p. 17. DESCRIPTION,?Length up to 55 mm., width up to 4 mm., seg- ments up to 115. Color, ?T1 life: greenish grey with green cirri bordered with brown; in alcohol: brownisli or greenish. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, gravel, rocks with large barnacles. 84 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Maryland (off Chesapeake Bay, Albatross Station 2011, 36? 38' N., 74? 40' W., 81 fathoms, 1883; Station 2265, 37? 07' N., 74? 35' W., 70 fathoms, 1884), Washington (between Point Evans and Fosdick, Puget Sound, 20-22 fathoms; Rosario Strait near Pevine Pass, Washington Sound). DISTRIBUTION.?Norway to Spain, Mediterranean, Adriatic, east coast North America (off Chesapeake Bay), Alaska to Washington, north Japan Sea to Japan, Yellow Sea, Manchuria. In 16 to 936 fathoms. Notophyllum ame?canutn Verrill, 1885a FlQUBE 17b Notophyllum americanum Verrill, 1885a, pi. 40, fig. 184; 1885b, p. 432.?Hartman, 1944a, p. 338, pi. 23, fig. 7. DESCKIPTION.?^Length up to 50 mm., width 5 mm., segments about 125. Color, in life: very dark green; preserved: brownish with bluish iridescence with dark brown cirri. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?^Type specimen from off Martha's Vineyard, Massachusetts, 100 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Known only from the original record, off Massa- chusetts (Martha's Vineyard). In 100 fathoms. Genus Eulalia Savigny, 1820 Hypoeulalia Bergstr?m, 1914; type (original designation): Hypoeulalia bilineala (Johnston, 1840). Type (designated by Bergstr?m, 1914, p. 76): Eulalia viridis (Linn?, 1767). Both species have the body elongate, slender, linear, convex dor- sally, flattened ventrally, attenuated at both ends. Prostomium suboval, slightly constricted just posterior to origin of four subequal frontal antennae, with 2 eyes of moderate size close to posterior margin (fig. 19a). Ail 3 tentacular segments visible dorsally. Ten- tacular cirri 4 pairs, cylindrical, fusiform, upper 2 pairs longer. Parapodia uniramous, slightly bilabiate distally; neurosetae com- pound. Dorsal cirri longer than wide. Proboscis long, cylindrical, with surface densely covered with rounded to cylindrical papillae (fig. 19a). Key to the New England Species of Eulalia 1. Dorsal cirri elongate-lanceolate, pointed distally (fig. 19i>). Prostomium witli median antenna subequal to frontal antennae (fig. IQo), Green- iah E- viridis Dorsal cirri thick, short, oval-obtuse, rounded distally (fig. 206). Pro- stomium with median antenna very small and slender, smaller than frontal antennae (fig. 20o). Usually greenish with lateral longitudinal dark bands E. bilineata POLYCHAETB WORMS, PART 1 prob iWW'fiV'fl/l/i/A fAn 85 FIGURE 19.?PhyUodocidae, Eulalia viridit: a, dorsal view anterior end, proboscis partially extended; b, para podium; c, neurosetae. Eulalia viridis (Linn?, 1767) FIGURE 19 Eulalia annulata Verrill and Smith, 1874, p. 291 (type in USNM).?Sumner, Os- burn, and Cole, 1913, p. 616.?Procter, 1933, p. 138. Eumidia papulosa Verrill and Smith, 1874, p. 290 (type in USNM). Eulalia pistacia Verrill, 1881, pp. 300, 304, 308, pi. 5, fig. 6 (part; types in USNM; = mixture of Eulalia triridis and Eumida sangu?nea),?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 617.?Miner, 1950, p. 314, pi. 102.?Pratt, 1951, p. 329. Eulalia dubia Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 704, pi. 8, figs. 101-105; 1887, p. 711 (types in USNM).?Miner, 1950, p. 314, pi. 102. Eulalia quadrioculata Moore, 19?6a, p. 220, pi. 10, figs. 4^6 (type in USNM).? Hartman and Reish, 1960, p. 11. Eulalia viridis Fauvel, 1923, p. 160, fig. 57,a-e; 1933, p. 15; 1953, p. 122, fig. 61,a-A.?Monro, 1933b, p. 19.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 157; 1938, p. 142.? 86 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Okuda, 1938, p. 88.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 37; 1944a, p. 338, pi. 23, fig. 11; 1948, p. 20, fig. 5o.?Thorson, 1946, p. ?8, fig. 25.?Bailiie, 1946, p. 473.-- Berkeley and Berkeley, 1948, p. 48.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 26, fig. 13a.? Wesenberg-Lund, 1950b, p. 35; 1951, p. 28.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 98, fig. 5.? Banse, 1959, p. 423.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 25.?Fauvel and RuUier, 1959, p. 511.?Clark, 1960, p. 16. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 150 mm., width up to 3 mm., seg- ments up to 200. Prostomium with 2 moderately large eyes; some- times with scattered pigment lateral to the eyes. Second tentacular segment with 2 pairs tentacular cirri, with setae. Longest tentacular cirri extend to setigers 10-12. Color, in life: pale to dark green in- cluding dorsal cirri, with or without brown spots on dorsal cirri and on bases of parapodia both dorsally and ventrally; dorsum also may be somewhat spotted; eggs green; color, preserved: pale to deep green, bluish gray, yellowish to golden brown, iridescent. BIOLOGY.?Found intertidally in rocky tide pools, in gravelly sand, peat, on pilings and wharfs among ascidians, sponges, mussels, algae (as Laminaria) and encrusting calcareous algae. Dredged on bottoms of sand, mud, rocks, gravel, stones, with shells, large barnacles, sponges, algae, "weed," bryozoan nodules, compound tunicates, being' especially abundant among sandy tunicates Amaroecium pellucidum (in Woods Hole area). One of the more abundant organisms found in the oc?anographie fouling studies in the New England area. Eggs laid in slimy green egg masses on sandy spots among rocks or on algae and sponges (Thorson, 1946). Males massed with white sperm masses and females with green eggs found in July (Rye Harbor, New Hampshire, July 3, 1958). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from North Atlantic (off Newfoundland, Gulf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, Maine, New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, Long Island Sound, low water to 64 fathoms), North Pacific (Washington and Puget Sound, Strait of Juan de Fuca, low water to 22 fathoms). DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Scandinavian countries to English Channel, Mediterranean, West Africa, Gulf of St. Lawrence to New Jersey, Alaska to Oregon, Pana- ma, Japan, China, Indian Ocean. In low water to 125 fathoms. Eulalia bilineata (Johnston, 1840) FIGURE 20 Eulalia gracilis Verrill and Smith, 1874, p. 292 (type in USNM).?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 703.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 617. Eulalia bilineata Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 710, pL 1, figs. 1-3, pi. 2, fig. 4 (type in USNM; same as E. bilineata Johnston, 1840). Eulalia bilineata Fauvel, 1923, p. 162, fig. 58,a-e.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 157; 1938, p. 143.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1948, p. 48, fig. 71.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1953, p. 32.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 98, fig. 5.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 25, POLTCHAKTE WORMS, PART 1 87 Hypoeulalia bilineata Procter, 1933, p. 138.?Hartman, 1942b, p. 35; 1944a, p. 338, pi. 23, fig. 9; 1959a, p. 154.?Hartman and Reish, 1950, p. 12. Eulalia problema Baillie, 1946, p. 472.?Treadwell, 1948, p. 26, fig. 13c. Eulalia (Hypoeulalia) bilineata Day, 1960, p. 300, fig. 5,d-f. DESCBIPTION.?Length up to 100 mm., width up to 2 mm., segments up to I?O. Second tentacular segment with setae. Longest tentac- ular cirri extend to setiger 5. In addition to the compound neurosetae, there may be long, delicate capillary setae extending far beyond the other setae; capillary setae mixed in with the other setae but not in separate bundles as in some of the Syllidae; evidently an epitokous condition associated with sexual forms. Color, in life: variable in coloration, gray, yellow greenish or olive brown, usually with lateral brown bands on each side and darker spots at bases of parapodia, both above and below; preserved: brownish iridescent, sometimes showing darker longitudinal bands, dorsal cirri dark velvety brown, almost black. fAn FIGURE 20.?PhyllodocLdae, Eulalia bilineata: a, dorsal view anterior end; b, parapodium; c, n u roseta. 88 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 BIOLOGY.?Found intertidally amone; rocks, in encrusting calcareous algae, in holdfasts of Laminaria. Dredged on bottoms of mud, fine grey sand, rocks, and various combinations of sand, gravel, rocks, with shells, bryozoan nodules, ascidians, hydroids. Sexually mature in May to July in British waters (Mclntosh, 1908). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?North Atlantic (Gulf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Long Island Sound, North Carolina, low water to 1,290 fathoms), North Pacific (Puget Sound, Washington, 30-60 fathoms). DISTRIBUTION.?Scattered records in the Arctic. Also Scandi- navian countries to British Isles, the Baltic, Gulf of St. Lawrence to North Carolina, Vancouver Island to central California, north Japan Sea, Yellow Sea, South Africa. Low water to 1,290 fathoms. Genus Eumida Malmgren, 1865 Type (monotypy): Eumida sangu?nea (Oersted, 1843). Both species have the body rather thickly set, relatively short and wide, tapering anteriorly and posteriorly, arched dorsally, flattened ventrally. Prostomium cordiform, rounded anteriorly, slightly notched posteriorly, \vith 2 eyes (fig. 21a). First tentacular segment not visible dorsally, the first pair of tentacular cirri lateral to pro- stomium; second tentacular segment with 2 pairs tentacular cirri; third segment with fourth pair tentacular cirri, setigerous lobes and ventral cirri. Neuropodia thick, bilobed distally; neurosetae com- pound, with long tapering terminal blades. Key to the New England Species of Eumida 1. Neuropodia bilobed distally with lobes subequal, rounded (fig, 216). Median antenna in middle of prostomium, more slender than frontal antennae. E. sangu?nea Neuropodia bilobed distally with supra-aeicular lobe longer, pointed; sub- acicular lobe shorter, rounded (fig. 21c). Median antenna posterior on prostomium, subequal in size to frontal antennae E. fusigera Eumida sangu?nea (Oersted, 1843) FIGURE 21,a, h Eumidia americana Verrill and Smith, 1874, p. 290.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 617. Eumidia vivida VerrjU and Smith, 1S74, p. 290 (part; type in USNM; = mixture of E. sanguinea and Eulalia viridis). Eumida maculosa Webster, 1S79, p. 215, pi. 4, figs. 38-41; 1886, p. 134.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 703. Eulalia longicornuta Moore, 1906a, p. 222, pi. 10, figs. 7-8 (type in USNM). Eumida iubiformia Moore, 1909b, p. 342, pi. 16, figs. 22-23 (type in USNM). Eulalia (Eumida) sanguinea Fauvel, 1923, p. 166, fig. 59,/-ft; 1953, p. 125, fig. 63,/-?;; 1955, p. 6.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 158; 1938, p. 143.?Thorson, POLTCHAETB WOHMS, PART 1 ,prOb 89 FIGURE 21.?Phyllodocidae, a-b, Eumida janguinea: a, dorsa! view anterior end, proboscis partially extended; h, parapodium. c, Eumida jusigera, parapodium (after Malmgren, 1865). 1946, p. 56, fig. 24.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1948, p. 47, fig. 69.?Wesenberg- Lund, 1949, p. 273.?Day, 1953, p. 411; 1960, p. 301.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 98, fig. 6.?Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 25.?Clark, 1960, p. 16.?Knox, 1960a, p. 113. Eumida sangu?nea Hartman, 1942b, p. 36; 1942c, p. 112, fig. 8,f-g; 1944a, p. 338, pi. 23, fig. 10; 1945, p. 14; 1951, p. 34.?Baillie, 1946, p. 473.?Tread well, 1948, p. 25, fig. 12&.?Hartman and Reish, 1950, p. 11.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 29.?Rioja, 1958, p. 228.?Reish, 1959, p. 78.?Eliaaon, 1962, p. 232. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 60 mm., width up to 4 mm., segments up to 140. Tentacular cirri 4 pairs, cylindrical, upper 2 pairs longer, extending to setigers 8-9. Dorsal cirri thin, anterior ones rather small, lanceolate; middle ones become broader, cordiform, pointed (fig. 216); posterior ones more elongated, pointed. Ventral cirri thin, oval, lanceolate, about length of setigerous lobe. Anal cirri wider 90 V.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 basally, tapered abruptly to slender tips. Extended proboscis cylin- drical, with a circle of papillae around opening, smooth or with somewhat indefinite scattered papillae (fig. 2la). Color, in life: extremely variable, pale, tannish, yellowish to brown including dorsal cirri, dusky, dotted or transversely banded with green or brown, eggs green; preserved: greyish green, tannish to reddish brown, may be somewhat spotted or transversely banded, dorsal cirri somewhat spotted. BIOLOGY.?Found intertidally, on shells, under rocks, on pilings along with tunicates, sponges, in roots of sea basket grass. Dredged on bottoms of mud, gravel, stones, rocks, with shells, algae, bryozoan nodules and especially abundant with sandy tunicates Amaroecium pellucidum. Numerous small specimens and females massed with green eggs were found during the summer months in the Woods Hole region. According to Thorson (1946, p. 56), they spawn in May to July. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from North Atlantic (Gulf of St. Lawrence, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connect- icut, Virginia, North Carolina, low water to 146 fathoms), Georgia (Sapelo Island, 10 fathoms). North Pacific (Washington and Puget Sounds, low water to 60 fathoms). DISTRIBUTION.?Iceland, Norway to France, Mediterranean, Adri- atic, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Georgia, Gulf of Mexico (Florida), Venezuela, Queen Charlotte Islands and Vancouver Island to Lower California, Mexico, Gal?pagos Islands, north Japan Sea to Japan, Persian Gulf, Black Sea, Red Sea, Indian Ocean, New Zealand, South Africa. In low water to 339 fathoms. Eumida fiisigera (Malmgren, 1865) FiGUBE 21c Sigefusigera Malmgren, 1805, p. 100, pi. 14, fig. 27. Eumida fusigera Levinsen, 1882, p. 205. Eulalia fusigera Banse, 1959, p. 425. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 30 mm., width without setae 4 mm., segments numerous. Tentacular cirri 4 pairs, first pair short, cylindrical; second and fourth pairs (upper ones) long, extend to about setiger 12; third lower pair shorter, flattened basally. Dorsal cirri elongate-lanceolate, little longer than the parapodial lobe. Ventral cirri elongate-pointed, about length of parapodial lobe. Proboscis smooth, without papillae. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud and sand. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?North Atlantic (Albatross Station 2262, 39?54' N., 69?29' W., 250 fathoms, 1884). DISTRIBUTION.?Norway, Sweden, off Massachusetts. In 250 fathoms. .. POLYCHAETE WOBMS, PAKT ;1 ? '91 Family Alciopidae Excli^^i^ly pelagiq. ||aaay be. consider|ed as pelagic phyllodocids derived^m^b tie Eu^^^-stock). Body transparent, rather short to considerably elongated, cylindrical, with regularly arranged pigmented glands, which may be associated with pigmented bands (fig, 22a) or pigmented lobes at the bases of the parapodia (fig. 23i>). Fragile, fragmenting easily. Prostomium small, with 4 frontal antennae and a median antenna (may be rudimentary), flanked by 2 enormous, spherical, highly organized, orange Or red eyes with globular lenses, directed laterally. The prominent lateral position and the extreme development of the eyes result in very extensive vision, forward, outward, and backward. Tentacidar cirri 3-5 piiirs. Parapodia elongated, uniramous, with foliaceous-dorsal and ventral cirri. Setae numerous; l?ngj capillary, transparent, all simple or all compound or both types. Predatory. Proboscis unarmed (rarely with horny denticles), encircled with papillae around oi)ening (two lateral papillae may be of considerable size). ??. ";, Many alciopids have evolved a copulatory mechanism whereby the males agglutinate tji? sperm into a kind of spermatophore arid transfer them to the females where they may be stored in modified parapodia or sperm reeeptacles until required (fig., 22a). Mostly oceanic in surface waters where they are sparsely dfetributed in the plankton. The 2 species included here are merely representatives t?f the family. Key to the Genera of Alciopidae " 1. Parapodia terminating in single cirritorm appendage (fig. 22,c,(j) . . Vanadia Parapodia terminating in 2xirriform appendages {fig. 236) Alciopa Genus Fanodis QajTarede, 1670 - Type (monotypy): Vanadis formosa Clapar?de, 1870. Van?dis longissima (Levinsen, ISiBS) Vanadis ionffissimoFauvel, 1^23, p: 207, fig. 77^/',^.?Monro, 1930, i>. 79, fig: 24.? ; St0p-.BQwitz, 1948a,:p. 29.?Dales, 1955, p.! 439; 1957, p. 12J, figs. 31-33.? ._.,/: ,,.Tebble,196q, p. .isf. ?. : );' ; ?. r. .i-:^' V- ^?i : '-i ? ,?>.-:=. DE8aBiwipiJ.-rr-L,ength up to 2,00 mm., width up to SfUun-f segmenta , up to, 200. Body!Ippg, thin, cylindrical, delical^e, Ijragnienting readily, ?traxispj^rent, with; bright red eyes; .and dark .brown glands, forming ohaiftcteristic segpiep,tally Arranged bands, Prostpmium small, w^th ,2 pairs :of. B,ubequal frontal antennae apd a shorf conical median an- tenna between the 2 enormous sphsrieal .ey^- Teiitacul?r C?JT? 569-457?63 7 92 ?.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 22.?Alciopidae, Vanadis longissima: a, dorsal view anterior end of female; i, same, ventral view; c, anterior parapodium; d, parapodium from middle region. 4 pairs, the first pair larger and united ventrally by an incised mem- brane. First 6-8 segments with parapodia rudimentary, without setae. In female, dorsal cirri of first 2 pairs of rudimentary parapodia modified into large globular sperm receptacles (fig. 22,a,h). Parapodial lobes longer than cirri, cylindrical, tapering to a single short cirriform appendage, from which aciculimi projects. Setae long, compound, fine, transparent. Dorsal cirri elongate-ovate, ventral cirri narrower and elongated. Pigmented segmental glands found on 1 or 2 successive segments followed by 4-9 segments which lack them ; glands rather small, accompanied by dark brown rings of pigment which form almost a complete circle. Proboscis cyhndrical, with 10 small toothlike subequal papillae. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 93 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Grampus {Bache) 1914, Station 10161, off Cape Hatteras, North Carolina, 35?23' N-, 73?14' W., 100-0 meters, January 28; Station 10166, off South Carolina, 32''33' N., 72?14' W., 100-0 meters, January 30; Station 10180, off Bermuda, 31?52' N., 65?14' W., 75-0 meters, February 18. DISTRIBUTION.?Cosmopolitan, Atlantic, Pacific, Indian Ocean, Antarctic. In surface waters. Genue Alciopa (Audouin and Milne-Edwards, MS.), Cuvier, 1830 Halodora Greeff, 1876; type (original designation): Halodora reynaudii (Audouin and Milne-Edwards). Greefia Mclntosh, 1885; type (inonotypy): Gree?a oahuensis Mclntosh, 1885; =Alciopa reynaudii (Audouin and Milne-Edwards, MS.), Cuvier, 1830. Type (monotypy) : Alciopa reynaudii (Audouin and Milne-Edwards, MS.), Cuvier, 1830. Alciopa reynaudii (Audouin and Milne-Edwards, MS.), Cuvier, 1830 FIGURE 23 Greeffia oahuensis Monro, 1930, p. 82, fig. 25.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1939, p. 35, fig. 23. Alciopa reynaudii Audouin and Milne-Edwards, 1833b, p. 238, pi. 15, figs. 6-11.? St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 30, fig. 21.?Dales, 1957, p. 124, figs 34, 35.?Tebble, 1960, p. 193. Greefia oahuerisis Berkeley and Berkeley, 1958, p. 400. DESCEIPTION.?^Length up to 50 mm., \vidtli up to 8 mm., segments up to 60, Body relatively short, tapering slightly anteriorly and considerably posteriorly. Prostomium extends slightly beyond the 2 very large globular lateral eyes, with 2 pairs short subulate frontal antennae and a median antenna in the dorsal groove between the eyes. Tentacular cirri 3 pairs, short, subulate. Parapodia terminating distally in 2 small cirriform appendages. Setae compound. Both dorsal and ventral cirri massive, foliaceous, ovate cordiform, somewhat frilled, imbricated, covering the parapodia almost completely. With prominent projecting brown glands, segmentally arranged dorsally and ventraHy at the bases of the parapodia. Proboscis with 2 long lateral papillae (usually project conspicuously from the mouth; fig. 23a). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Grampus {Bache) 1914, Station 10195, north of Bahamas (29? N., 76?23' W., 100-1 meters, February 28), Station 10200, Straits of Florida (23?32' N., 81?48' W., 75-0 meters, March 18). DISTRIBUTION.?Cosmopolitan, North and South Atlantic, Indian Ocean, tropical Pacific, Antarctic. In surface waters. 94' U.S. NATIONAL IfCfSEtTM BULtalT?Ni 227 ??CVRE ?3.?rAlciopidap? 4^<^?PP^ reynaudii: ?,_ ventral view anteripr qnd with 2 large ,pap?l?ae ?ff?robosc?s projecting from.rn'o?tii; ?,.parapodi?m, postbrior?tie'w.' ??- ?-'"--??? :.? :'-'K-: '-lo., : FaSE?ily^T?mopteridae- ?;..;-:?- :;? ^.????:. ; V-? ^: ::Ikcluaiy^ely; pelagic:; Bpdjf.fipbrle^,;, t^?^^sparent,,.|pryfta4 .c|ea,F, s?grt?ents,?ew,,wjtho^}i distinct ;^gi}^entallij;teS;^ ?RP^- '.: ^'r?'^?;^*^P^" ing; except for ,^';single?ititeri3jal,set?i >Q, eacjbi ol pii?, tO;t:Tf9,,?a,irs of, anterior jnodified, ^enta?iiLlai; ; ;ci?Ti,.,, . Prostoiwiuni and, tei^tacular, sijg- m?nts fusj3d;,tp. farm ?a, .head reg?oji. j^pyided, writh ,^. pair,,9f diy^rgipg flattfeBied antgrioi; ?iiitennae,: ti, shiJTt pair of tentacular cip?i, ifm^- be, smally inoo??spicu?us or lac?ving,;f?g;,A5a),; a.iarge pair ,pf .t;,epta?ulajr cirri which may be longer than the body, a pair of ciliated epaul^tt^^ or nuchal organs neay tha bases of tlie;tentacular cirri, ,2,,deep-set ?yes cliosevtothft .oval icerebral/.ganglion (visible du?^ t?). ;^e trans- pareacy of.the.body);^'i,-, :'. ,.?.?; -;..;?. ,.?. .;,?;;,?? .?;??;::,, ._,,.:-..??. Parapodia of trunk region longer than the body is wide,: without setae or acicula, distally bilobed, ?each rapius bordered with a flattened finlike membrane or pinnul? bearing glands of various kinds, referred to as rosette organs (yellow or brown spheres with a darker center; with fatty globules blackened by osmic acid; thought to be luminea- ';^ i'O?i?C??AE'P? WOBMS, PA?T 1 ' ' ?5 cdnt organs)V chromtfpfiUe glahds (cblorf?ss, stain'With n??lear stftins as hematoxylin), and hyaline glands (not stained by h???iatoxylin; ?St?ally?ol?r?d^by '?'reddish-brown secretion). Proboscis eversible, shorty uiiairttit?d ; when everted, has the shape of an elliptical disk. Voracious predatois in the plankton. Soi?c species may at times be the doiainant forftis of the plankton- and l?ust be of considerable iinportainc? as food fot fishes. Swim with great swiftness by the rapid Vibratio?is ?f the lateral finlike'parapodia, darting through the ?Tra,ter ?H alt^dirftcti?tts: ?'? ? - ? ^?' ?' ? ?? Contains o?ily one Net^ England gfenus. ii ^i. I, :;G(ei^us Ifowpptem ?i?ckscholtZj 1?2$ Type (monotypy) : Tomopteris onisciformis Eschscholtz, 1825. Both species have the long setigerous tentacular cirri originating from broad subconical"-bases,' extending from one half to almost the length of the body (fig. 24).. Parapodial rami conical, entirely bordered by oval membra;no?s plates or pinnules (fig. 25,6-c). Key to the New England SpecicB of Tomopteris 1. With a tail regioii (fig. 24; absent in yoiingX/^ Rosette organs present (fig, 256). With first pair short tentacular cirri present in young (fig. 25a), absent in aduH. (fig. 24). With gonads in botjl dorsal and ventral rami of parapodia . , . ". . ^ . . .' .... T. hclgolandica Without a tail,.region. "Eosette organs abselit.: .Without first tentacular cirri in young or adult. With gonads in dorsal rami of parapodia only (fig. 25c). . i ., . . ?. . , T. septentrionalis Tomopteris helgolandica Gr?eff, 1879 ^ ; ^riGURES 24, 25,0,5 Tomopteris smithii Verr?l?, 1879, p. 182.?Hartman, 1944?l, p. 338, pi. 25, figs. 8,9. :,;; "'". ? v., \ Tomopteris {JohnstoneUcCj helgolandica Moore, 1903b, p. ?^9>, pi. 55, fig. 13.? Bouthern, 1911,p.8,^Sumner, Osburn, aftdGole, 1913, i*.624.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 221, fig. m,h,i; 195?f p. 143, fig. 71,fe,i.^St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 42, fig. 28.? Clark, 1960, p. 17.?Eliason, 1962, p. 238. ! Tomopteris (Johnstonella) ?atkarina Huntsman, 1921, p. 86,|figs. 1,2.?-Bigelow, 1928, p. 334, fig. 94.?? ?S[ot Goss^^i^853. i DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 87 mm., width up to 8 mm., segments 15-34 (of which 4-14 may form the tail region). Body widest in the region of parapodia 4 or 5, jtapering gradually posteriorly, then abruptly in the cylindrical tail region (provided with rudimentary parapodia only). With parapodial rosette organs (yellow in life; yellowish brown when preserved) on the inner sides of the ramal tips (fig. 256) as well as on the ventral rami of the first 2 pairs of para- podia; with chromophile glands (colorless or gray; deeply stained with hematoxylin) rather small, found ventrally on pinnules of ventral 96 tr.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 rami; without hyaline glands. Gonads develop in both dorsal and ventral rami. BIOLOGY.?The species has been studied in some detail by Southern (1911), Huntsman (1921), and Bigelow (1928). Individuals fre- quently appear in the Gulf of Maine, though never forming an im- portant constituent, quantitatively speaking. Found chiefly outside the outer islands and rarely in estuarine waters tributary to the Gulf of Maine. Taken in every month of the year with no definite fluc- tuation in abundance from season to season, from the surface to 100 fathoms, migrating daily and coming to the surface most often at night. Reproduces during the summer in the Gulf of Maine, re- producing at least enough to maintain a rather sparse stock. Very FIGURE 24.?Tomopteridae, Tomopttris helgolandica, dorsal view (drawn from type of TomopUris smiihii Verrill). POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 97 abundant in the Grand Banks off Newfoundland. Invades the shallow water near the Ireland coast. Breeds from May until August in Irish waters. Withstands temperatures from 15? to ?1? C, optimum temperature being comparatively low. Its salinity range is 31 to 34 ?/oo (above 34 in Irish waters). Seems to be chiefly a coastal form. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?-Numerous specimens from the Gulf of Maine to north of Bahama Bank, surface to 133 fathoms. Also type of T. smithii Verrill from Eastport, Maine. DISTRIBUTION.?Grand Banks off Newfoundland, Gulf of Maine to north of Bahamas, North Sea around Ireland, English Channel to off Portugal, Mediterranean, Sargasso Sea, off South America (mouth of Amazon River), Indian Ocean. Surface to 1,000 fathoms. Tomopt^ris septentrionalis Steenstrup, 1849 FIGURE 25C Tomopteris septentrionalis Southern, 1911, p. 20.?Fauve!, 1923, p. 224, fig. 84(i.?Huntsman, 1921, p. 90.?Big?low, 1928, p. 340.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1936, p. 4; 1951, p. 32; 1953, p. 34.?St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 49, figs. 36, 37; 1949, p. 12.~Kielhorn, 1952, p, 236.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 110, fig. 13.? Dales, 1955, p. 440; 1957, p. 145, figs. 51, 52.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1957, p. 575.?Tebble, 1960, p. 176, fig. 8. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 22 mm., width up to 6 mm., segments 17-24. Body oval lanceolate, attenuated posteriorly, without a tail region. Both parapodial hyaline and chromophile glands at the apex of the pinnule of the ventral ramus, the hyaline glands (unaffected by hematoxylin) small, indistinct, may appear faint reddish brown; chromophile glands (colorless, deeply stained by hematoxylin) ventral to the hyaline glands. Gonads develop in dorsal rami only (fig. 25c). BIOLOGY.?Characteristically an oceanic species found in deep-sea areas where it may dominate the pelagic community of the surface. Found at all depths to 900 fathoms but especially abundant in surface waters. A eurythermic species, inhabiting the cold and temperate waters of both hemispheres. Breeding season probably prolonged over a long interval, reaching its maximum in the months of autumn in West Greenland waters (Wesenberg-Lund, 1936). In the Lab- rador Sea, specimens caught generally in night surface tows, both adults and juveniles occurring together through the year (Kielhorn, 1952). Comparatively insignificant in percentage of the total popula- tion, but probably exerts a noticeable effect in the economy of the region. Voracious predator, preying on almost all of the other animals of digestible size. Dales (1955, 1957) found it to be the most abundant species of Tomopteris in the collections made off the Pacific coast of North America, it being most common north of San Francisco, 98 ??.S. ?STATIONAIJJVIUSEDM;. BULLETIN 227 'Vt6uAEj2?.'^ViMiopteiidi?,'a^b, Tom&pU?iikHgolt?ridka: ?ii,!dot?a\ vief^ty?hng ?peeinwn , (aftec ^Enjertjoii, j? ??artni^?i, 1944a) ; i; parspodiMn?- (jaft^cf :?k4i?iore, J(903b).: ; -c, Tpm?pienis -. .u.pUnffionalis^.cf?ffpo?mm.. ^^ , ., ,,,.., ..,, ,i, ;., ..,'.?: ,,-,, wtere it appeared t?? b? 4 cold-water coastal form (p?rMps due to tie raj?d shelving and'upwdling in, t^ MATERIAL 'EXAMINED.?Jg'r?w^w' (Ha?H?) ' Station^ ?Ol'6^!; o?f'South A^?^???? Station 20107, ?astetn Ch?ian?l between Browns and Oeoi^? Banks:'(42??9'I?;,\6^ Station 20129,: ?gintihental edge Q^'Nl^ 69?o^'%.,'idd-? keters,"M8^ i?; 1920)^^.';'^ ; \ ' ;';" ?iSTRiB?TiON.-?Cosmop?litah, Arq'tic, North Atlantic l(?? Norway to panar?es, Baltic, North S?p,, Mediterranean/Davis StrM South O^rolina), South'Atlantic (off ?frica), Antarctic; [North B^c?fic (Japan, British Colurpbia to ceptral California), South ?Pacific, (off Chue, New Zealand). Surf ace'to' 9?0 fathoms. ' , - ', ,' ? " . V'' /?' ??-''F?rriily Ty-pMbsc^?iet?dae ;'^/''?'';? ^ ;'":'' i Exclusively pelagic. Body shiaJl, fusifomi olr eyliadrioaly trans- , parl?t. ' ProstomiuTn iconieal', Bcsmtetimes terminating; in/a' slender palpode, without eyes. A pair of prominent nuchal organs. Tentac- ??; PO?YGHAKTE WOKMS, PART *1>' ^ 99^ ular cirri 3 pairs, Mikc?oas, buried forward; ??tcrtil to and enclosing prostomium and anterior part of body;; Parapodia uniramous, witli lobes much reduced, wit)} a few short acicular setae, \yitli foli?ceo us dorsal and ventral cirri. ?Pair of foliaeeous anal oirri. Contains'only one New England genus.' G&aua Travisiopsis Levinsen, 1885 Type (m?notj'py) : Tram?ops?s ?Q6^^^ Both species'Have tlie'body short, cylindrical, slightly attenuated at bQth end^, the posterior end, ?videnti?y forming an effective swim- miagoTgan, 'lliey?re colorless or jellowisbj ?iroost transparent. Prostoni??jiii conical, "^witli ? 'pro'j?ct?ng nj?dian'papilla or -caruncle, with a pair of' "ca??t?? niiicbal ' organs. Tentacular ciril 3 pairs, spoon-shaped, curled forward enclosing prostomium and anterior end of body. Parapodia uniramous, with setal lobes only slightly pro- jecting, with a few acicular setae.. Dorsal and ventral cirri large, leaflike, nearly square shaped in middle of body^ becdming elongate- lanceolate p?J^teriorly'f A pair of large anal- cirri, spatulate, slender basally, brb&d?St distally, iwith a thickened hyaline rib in the middle. ?Key to the New England Species of Travisiopsis 1. Nuchal organ encircling the median papula or prostomial caruncle laterally and anteriorly (fig. 26tt). . . . , . . T. lobifera Nuchal organ not extending anterior to caruncle (fig. 26&) . . T. levinseni Travisiopsis lobifera Levinsen, 1885 FIGURE 26a Travisiopsis lobifera Fauvel, 1923, p. 229, fig. m,a-?; 1953, p. 13.9, fig. 71,a-?.? St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 57, fig. 44.?Dales, 1955, p. 442; 1957, p. 148, figs. 58, 59.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1957, p. 577.?tebble, 1960, p. 196, fig. 13a. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 30 mm., width up to 3 mm., segments 21. Median papilla or caruncle oval. Nuchal organ consists of a pair of lobes encircling the caruncle laterally and anteriorly and pro- jecting posteriorly as a short free lobe (fig. 26a). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Grampus (Bache) Station 10166, off South Carolina (32?33' N., 72?55' W., 100-0 meters, January 30, 1914); Station 10209, north of Bahama Bank (27?57' N., 78?15' W., 100-0 meters, March 22, 1914). ^ ' DISTRIBUTION.?Off Azores, Canaries, Arabian Sep., off Nova Scotia to Bahamas, northeast Pacific (off Oregon to tower California), Indian Ocean, South Atlantic. Surface waters to 280 fathoms. 100 XJ.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Travisiopsis levinseni Southern, 1910 FiGUBE 266 Travisiopsis levinseni Southern, 1911, p. 32, pi. 2, figs. 7-10.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 229, fig, 86,?-?;.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1?36, p. 12, figs. 4^5; 1951, p. 33.? St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 59, fig. 47; 1949, p. 19.?Dales, 1955, p. 442; 1957, p. ISO.-Tebble, 1960, p. 197, fig. 13b. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 30 mm., width up to 1.5 mm., seg- ments 25. Median papilla or prostomial caruncle wide, flat, sub- rectangular. Nuchal organ consists of a pair of short undulating lobes extending laterally and posteriorly to the caruncle (fig. 266). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Albatross Station 2045, southwest Mar- tha's Vineyard, Massachusetts (40='04' N., 68?43' W., July 31, 1883; Station 2194, 39?43' N., 70?07' W., surface, August 5, 1884). FIGURE 26.?-Typhloscolecidae, a, Travisiopsis lobifera, dorsal view, b, Travisiopsis Uvinsini, dorsal view anterior end (after Wesenberg-Lund, 1936). POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 101 DiSTRiBUTiON.?Davis Strait, off Newfoundland to south of Massa- chusetts, south Iceland, off Ireland, Azores, Mediterranean, Arabian Sea, South Atlantic, Antarctic, northeast Pacific (off California), South Pacific (New Zealand). Surface to perhaps deep abyssal ?1,055 fathoms). Family Heeionidae Body small to moderate in size. Prostomium distinct, suboval to subquadrangular, usually with 4 eyes (0, 2, or 4), 2 or 3 antennae, 2 palps (may be biarticulate). Tentacular segments 1 to 4, achaetous, more or less distinct, with 2 to 8 pairs of tentacular cirri. Parapodia biramous or subbiramous; notopodia may be reduced to acicula in the cirrophores of the dorsal cirri, with notosetae simple or lacking. Neurosetae compound, with terminal blades long to short. Dorsal cirri short to long, smooth or more or less distinctly articulated; ventral cirri shorter, about the length of the neuropodia; 2 anal cirri. Carnivorous. Proboscis cylindrical, eversible, with or without mar- ginal papillae, with or without horny jaws. Often conspicuously and brilliantly colored, A number of hesionid species show commensalistic tendencies. Many are highly active and irritable, darting back and forth when touched. They may break up rather easily; some swim readily. Key to the New England Genera of Hesionidae 1. Tentacular cirri 6 pairs on 3 distinct segments (segments not crowded or reduced (fig. 27a)). With anal plate in addition to short anal cirri, an entire flattened disc (fig. 27c) or bilobed plate (fig. 276). Prostomium with 2 rudimentary eyes or eyes lacking, 2 lateral antennae, a median occipital antenna, 2 palps (fig. 27o) Microphthalmus Tentacular cirri 6-8 pairs on 3 to 4 anterior segments, some of which are crowded and reduced dorsally. Without anal disc, with a pair of long anal cirri only (fig. 295). Prostomium with 4 eyes, 2 lateral antennae, 2 palps, with or without a median antenna (when present, anterior, not occipital; fig. 28o) 2 2. Prostomium with a short median anterior antenna, with biarticulate palpa (fig. 28a,c). Notopodia rudimentary, reduced to acicula and few simple capillary notosetae (fig. 28,6,d) 3 Prostomium without median antenna (fig. 29a). Tentacular cirri 6 pairs . 4 3. Tentacular cirri 6 pairs Podarke Tentacular cirri 8 pairs Gyptis 4. Palps biarticulate. Notopodia rudimentary, reduced to acicula in cirrophores of dorsal cirri, with or without few capillary notosetae; neuropodia with 3 conical lobes (fig. 28?) Nereimyra Palps unjointed (fig. 29a). Notopodia forming a distinct lobe with capillary notosetae; neuropodia diagonally truncate, without conical lobes (fig. 29c) Parahesione 102 t7.S. NAiaONAt M???S?iTJM B?LtETEf 227 'Type (mbiiptypy),': MicropTiflialm?s sczet?coim? 'Xf?czflil?ow,' ?865. ' ' : BotH species are of small size/vcrm?iprinVTOdesl!ij) the,itt^^ i?tten?ated at ?B?th. ends,' convex dorsal?y, ' i?att?n?d ventri?lly, ' w?m segments deeply incised. Prostomium rounded anterioi'?y arid later- ally, nearly straight to .sjiglii-ly jconc^TQ posteriorly, with a pair of small posterolateral eyes (may be absent), with additional few scat- tered pi^nent granules^ with a pair of filiform; llateral toteimaei d?or- s ally ja .shorter pajf; of filiform palpSiTrentraWy, a slend?r occipital median: antennat attached .-posterior?y (fig^h37a)i!f?Three ?distinot achaetoU? tentacular segments each with' 2 pairs-tentacularl cirriy aji upper and;lower;pa?rl;;,i' ,,;,M:.;;, . .y-.:i: ':.^<\\ ?:'??:. ? .:i .?v;:- The I tentacular, .eirrt, arise ; from, inflated cirrophoreg, ? th? styles Ipeing wide^ibasallyS tapering di?3t&U;y!'tO! slender,tipa.. ?Tentaculai cirri of first seginesnt/?indilowei? p?ir.ofi?econdi se^jjtent ivea?lyeqi?al;: upper pair:of.secondis?pj^entabout Iwi?easlongi; uppfer pairiof thi?isegment stiU. longei*,! lower .^air about a fourth i as lojig;. J??r?podia ; unequally bijjamQus.' .,., .;.,.^.,.: ,?:,:;,-? :,.? .,? ,. ,??, , ^ , ; :! r-i!- ?;:;;:? ::;.T i l.y'?nftl,qr'py?|diar piafe Kood shaped,' with border ,entire (figi 27c). Body ," 'dott?d With brown pigm?rvt in poorly denned, fJCS-nsyerse.,bands,, and . ?sp?ciaiiyfd''irk ??tM^I^J! /,,v:-v! ?,?:;?'.:.??'?,'!.?':?,'?.?.? M. sczelfcowii ^ Anal p?a?e ? ,fl'?it Mip^^ed struc^re (fig:^ slightly '. duS|ky .', . . \ ' . '. . . . ? . ?' - - . - - . ..,?.,- - ?,? ? M".aberrans Podarke caeca Webster and Benedict, 1884, p: 766, pU lv?flgs.'&-8,'-*^Ariner, 1950, Mic?9}}kthalmus sczelkowii Southern, 1914, pi. 45, -pi.; ;5,' HgD 6,(t-?ir^F?uvel, ?^ ';;1923, p. 250, fig, 93,?-/.?Usohakov, 1955, p. Ii9% fig.-SD.'^^Rasmmssen, '?-'W5&ppi'4ai?^.P?--i&.- ^ ?:: ;?:???;: .'.'.??;? '??? -.vv-,.'- -i both dorsally and ventrally, transversely banded dorsally in 2 to 4 poorly defined bands and ventrally in 4 irtegular longitudinal bfend?. IJi?toGY.?^Fo[ind ^t low water in'saiid apidtubbje,'Under stones, and in siialiow water on muddy bottom. According to ?lasmussen (1:956,), tbey Jay eggs in un irregular oval sticky mucous mass, probably early in the'yeiar. Adults, rnassed with alargo yol'ky eggs in June (Barnstable Harbor, Massachusetts, June 22^ 1959,"H, Sanders) :? ^ MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Type of Podarke ctte?a?rotii Pi-ovihcet?Wn, Massaoltosetm' Also "Wellfle?t Harbor, north sbore,''sandy rubble; BamstablW Harbor, 1959, H. SandersJ '? ' ^ D??THiB?wo??)?Ireland, North Sea- (Helgoland), Ma?saichusett? (Cape Cod), north Japan Sea. Low \v*ater to 6 fathoms. 104 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIK 227 Microphthalmus aberrans (Webster and Benedict, 1887) FIGURE 27,a,b Podarke aberrans Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 713, pi. 1, figs. 14-18, pi. 2, figs. 19-20. Microphthalmus aberram Southern, 1914, p. 46, pi. 5, fig. 7. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 9 mm., width including setae up to 1 mm., segments up to 51. Notoseta simple, curved, spinous. Proboscis with 10 wide conical papillae around opening. Color: white or may be slightly dusky. Appears to be hermaphroditic, with sex products (white eggs) massed from setiger 10 to end of body, with a copulatory structure (on left side between setigers 2 and 3), and viviparous (1 specimen had fertilized eggs and ciliated larvae inside). BIOLOGY.?Found at low water in sand and gravelly sand. Found associated with two terebeUids, crawling on the surface of the body and among the numerous oral tentacles of Lysilla alba Webster and Enoplobranchus sanguineus (Verrill). Adults massed with eggs were found in June (West Fahiaouth Harbor, Massachusetts, June 26, 1954). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Types from Eastport, Maine. Also Maine (Cape Newagen, Southport Island, Boothbay Harbor), New Hamp- shire (Rye Harbor; Fort Stark, sand sievings, 1955, N. Eiser), Massa- chusetts (West Fahnouth HarJjor, inside breakwater). DISTRIBUTION.?Maine to Massachusetts. Low water. Genus Podarke Ehlers, 1864 Type (designated by Hartman, 1969a) : Podarke agilis Ehlers, 1864. Contains only one New England species. Podarke obscura Verrill, 1873a FIGURE 28,a,h Podarke obscura Verrill and Smith, 1874, pp. 25, 88, 146, pi. 12, fig. 61.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 706.?Webster, 1886, p. 135, pi. 5, figs. 17-18.? Treadwell, 1901a, p. 399.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 616.?Hart- man, 1944a, p. 338, pi. 34, fig. 2 (juvenile), pi. 23, fig. 12 (as Castalia cin- cinnata); 1944c, p. 16; 1945, p. 14.?Miner, 1950, p. 300, pi. vii, 1, viii, 2.?Pratt, 1951, p. 330, fig. 452.?Costello, et al., 1057, p. 90. ? Podarke guanica Hoagland, 1919, p. 571, pi. 29, figs. 1-4.?Rioja, 1958, p. 235. Podarke near guanica Hartman, 1951, p. 36, pi. 10, figs. 1-3. DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 40 mm., width including setae up to 3 mm., segments up to 90. Body widest in the middle, tapering gradually posteriorly and less so anteriorly, convex dorsally, flattened ventrally, with segments deeply incised laterally. First tentacular segment not visible dorsally, with 2 pairs of tentacular cirri lateral to POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 105 prostomium, next 2 tentacular segments distinct, each, with 2 pairs of tentacular cirri. Tentacular cirri slender, without articulations, sim- ilar in shape and length to dorsal cirri. Dorsal cirri long, slender, articulated, alternately longer and shorter, about equal in length to body width. Neuropodia cylindrical, tapering to bluntly conical processes. Neurosetae compound, with blades long to short. Proboscis eversible, with large inflated basal portion and smaller cylindrical terminal portion, without jaws or papillae. Color, in life: dark rusty brown or blackish dorsally and ventrally including prostomium, usually mth lighter transverse bands?may be 3 per segment; eyes reddish; in alcohol: colorless. BIOLOGY.?A small but active worm found at low water on muddy sand flats, under stones, among eelgrass, on shells, on pilings among hydroids, ascidians, etc. Dredged among shells, sponge masses, clumps of algae, especially common in "weed" in Vineyard Sound, among ascidians (as sandy Amaroecium). Found in salt ponds (Charlestown Pond, Rhode Island, H. P. Jefferies). It shows commensalistic tendencies, having been found among the spines of the sea urchin Lytechinus and on the oral surface of echino- derms (Florida, Hartman, 1951), and with the terebellid Lysilla alba (West Falmouth Harbor, Massachusetts, 1954); it was also found inside the sea cucumber Thyone (Woods Hole; it came out when the cucumber was being injected with magnesium chloride solution, J. F. Hickok, August 1953). It becomes sexually mature during July and August, the females appearing brown, with brownish eggs, the males cream colored. They may come out at night in vast numbers, swimming at the surface ; they are attracted to light. The eggs are laid in the evening between 7 and 10 o'clock; artificial fertilization is possible if the eggs have been ex- truded, not otherwise (Treadwell, 1901). According to Moore (MS.), the species lends itself admirably for regeneration and grafting experi- ments. Bifid monsters and abnormalities of segmentation are common. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Type specimen from Vineyard Sound. Also numerous specimens from Massachusetts (Cape Cod, Vineyard Sound, Buzzards Bay), Rhode Island, Connecticut, North Carolina, Georgia, Florida (Cedar Keys, E. L. Pierce, March 9, 1955; Seahorse Key, J. Taylor, 1960), in low water to 458 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Cape Cod) to Florida, Gulf of Mexico (Florida, Mexico), Bermuda, West Indian region and Carib- bean Sea. Low water to 458 fathoms; surface. im U.S. NATIONAL ?MUSEUM B?IiI?ET3N 227 71- F?GUR? 28;?Hesi?nid?e, a-b, Podarie obscura: a, prOstOmium; .i^ paf?p?c?ium." c-?,' ?yp?is tittat?:ic;- ^iaii?mmxk; d, flafapddi?in.' ?'? ?/VeT??tej?/a''pat??3a/paraFlo(??um.- ' ? Type (monotypy): Gyptis propinqua Marion and Bobretzky,'1875. G?htMTis ?My-one Nivv'Engltei? Species/ ?>.???: ., i : ?'; I i ..rCyp??^v?t?ata Webster ?^n^iBpiuadict, 1887 ; , :<: i. .:;?":;?? ,:;J::'' -EIQ?RB :2^C,C? ?,,/??-;;;,?; : .:i;: . : ?..???; Gyptis nitlata Webster:and.Benedict, 1887^p. 7l6,.i5l.l, flgSi. 21, 22, pl.i2, fig..23.; ' Dfcsc?tiPT?oN;^-4-Length up to fr'mm:, width ineluding aetde up to 2 mm. Body widest in tiie rfiiddle region, tap&rihg ?nteri?rly and posteriorly, convex dorsa?y^ flatt&n?d ventrally'. First tentacular' segment not visible dorsally, with 2 pairs tentacular cirri lateral to prostomium. Next 3 achaetous tentacular segments distinct but crowded, each with 2 pairs tentacular cirri. Tentacular cirri articu- EOt?CIiAETE W053VIS, EART, 1 r 107 lated, some longer than 4oi:sal cirri, upper ones longer than lower oiies. Notopodiai? small aonicallobe on the lower side of the ciri-ophOre ofi the dorsal.cirtus, with acicula and few (6 or so) capillary setae. Neu- ropodia elongate conicaL, Neuroseta? compound, ^\^ith appendages long to shiort. : Dorsal cirri, articulated. Ventral cirri shorter than neuropodia. : ; Proboscis with a wide basal ring, a narrower ?uor? distal ring with a circle of papillae in the middle of the ring. Without color or with yellowish brown bands (in life)I ??: :.;' BIOLOGY,?Found at low water under rocks. Dredged on bottoms of shdls. MATERIAL EXAMiNED.i?^Type, ?from Eastport,, Maine;; also Hadley Harbqrj; Woods Hole, Massachusetts. . , : ? ,Di8TBi3'U?riON.r?Maine to Massachusetts. Low water to 30; fathom?.;-' .;-?. - ' ??? ...:?'' . . .? H .; ? . .???: -. ;..? ?? Genus iVerei/nyra Blainville, 1828 Cast??ta S?vig?y, 1820, preoc?upied by Lamarck (1819, m Moll.) ; type {in?oo- Xy\>y):0a3t(iUa rosea (F.abricius, 1780);<=iVerei?ni/ro:pM)i(;iaia (O, E, Miillej-; ... 1776). V ?,,:;, ??? ' ::' ,; : V^' .: ,- ^:. .!??:??.? ; , Type designated by St0p-Bowitz, J948a: N0reimyrarose[':['.-:ii^ ??::syllii ^ gT?tnlandka: a; dorsal view ?nteriot end j ' fc, iraniei ?i veritraLv??w;!;:, doftal vie^jf posterior ?end.?i specimea of: 52^ segmsntSj witih ceganeramg posterior end;' i,-mW."?). Veotral cirri digitiform, about the length oi: the p?f'f^iodial Ipbes. Arial cirri g, the lateral pair ' longl,,articulate,/th^^^ one a short atyle., Antefipfepd pi extended proWei^.wi?i ft amocth chitinous ri?t?, a single large dorsal tooth, with a ring of 10 short papillae (with or without an additional ring of papillae more bask?ly). ' i : -r i >' Key to the ]\?w England Specieaof %7ifi?' ^^ 1,. With simple setae only on all the segments (hlades,of,cqipDoundisetae par- ;. ?; .. ?'*^'y:,9?; completely iu^e?i, tp, p.hiift, >vith. artifiu,lations ;obs?tJiVioi,,absent^ .: r ,Cfig.;^^f.,ff7^^^,.,..!porsal cirri with 40-70 articles. Sexual stolon (ch'aeto-' .;,:,, syms.^^^)'vmknpi?yii .. , .,. ^..,...,;..,,,. ,,,.,... ;S.,spQAig?pl??J^ ?(p.^lH) ;': : : ^}i^ orss^l, cirri with . .%1-^. ?%?!4FM (fig- 32ft).' Sexual stolon; (cMetpsylUs,'st^ei.'jwith three hieaded'antennae, with or without tentacu?9,rcirr|-, (fl-3i paired', fig.; agd). y'?.'-':,-?? i ,: ???''? ?:, . ?/!-'-?::??'?/: ^^ I,- ; w - ^1--^ ?.;.. ; ?:vg'?C?l?S ;)(p.,;^: 16). r All,satire Q9^J^u^d, with long and short distalblades ,(fig. 31, i-j),. Dorsal : cirri with, 11-40 ^fticles. Sqxual stolon, (chaetpsyllis stage) with a?^jngle pair of beaded antennae, without tentacular cirri . . . S. cisTarBTj?i o N .^Off^ Maissachiisetts to off^ eh?sfaiji?ak? Bay. In 7 0 to'3 iV-fathoms. ?'? ' ????-- .??.:!.!';' M-'-L;>;^ :->?: i-y .-??.,?:/,;:;; POLTC??AET^ ;WORM% PART, TI: m FiouB? 3l.-~Sytll?a?, ?-d, Exogo?f 'vei^geya: ?a,' ?or^al view>arifen?r end; &,!?ompoaild f?lcig?r;'?, compo?tid spinigar; ?, upper simple-seta, '-t-^f, Efiegpnahebes.inhapr^ebit&t . ? ajid Benedict,: '18i84),: ??.-coihpqund seta frccm ami?rior ^parajXi??iapli /, uppecsirnpl^.seta -. - from mididie of, body., g-A, Syllts, spoj^gipkila: g, seta from anlcdor region- (blade partially ; fus?d to. sha{^);r/!, seta froirf middle region (blade completely fused to shaft). ?-j, Syllis ? fofwiiiij.-.i, cbmpquad fa?ciger ' from ' a^iterior region;'/, same, with shorter^"t??dfeV i, SirfjtiilOJji/ii?'tiiti'iarij-,'pai-apbdiuni ffoin'anterior re^on. 'l-htf'Stript?iyllii atenai'-(,ihtr '? Webster ??id Benedict, 1884)-: /, ??mpo?'nd.Setaj: 'm, tipper: simple- ?eta^ ?. B^J, ?i4-iy!l" ..'blomstrandi: n,i:dorsal view: afiterior eadji Oj ,) with 2-4 prenatatory, 11-27 natatory, 1-6 postnatatory setigers; nuchal epaulettes inconspicuous; body colorless or pale yellow; egg sac a single large sac which may be somewhat pinched in the middle, with eggs tan, orange, or bright red. Male stolons (fig. 40c) with 3 prenatatory, 17-25 natatory. 146 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 FIGURE 40,?Syllidae, Autolyius proltfrr: a, dorsal view anterior and posterior ends, with chain of female sexual buds; b, dorsal view anterior end of female stolon or sacconereis stage, massed with eggs; c, dorsal view anterior end of male stolon or polybostrichus stage. 0-2 postnatatory setigcrs; body brownish red or green (for details of chain formation of stolons, see Mensch, 1900a). BIOLOGY.?Found at low water among stones, algal clumps, hold- fasts of Laminaria, on pilings among bydroids, bryozoans, ascidians. They form tough tubes. Dredged down to 15 fathoms, on gravelly bottoms, with shells, among algae, bryozoan nodules, tunicates (as sandy Amaroecium). They were present in the oc?anographie foul- ing studies in the New England region. Stem forms in the process of forming sexual stolons are found at any time of year but are POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 147 especially abundant in June through August (Massachusetts), in Au- gust (Maine) ; sexual stolons in surface waters have been found in June to October; sexual forms are common in inshore plankton in late spring and early summer in British Isles (Whitstable, Newell, 1954). MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Gulf of St. Lawrence (off Cape Bon Ami, 30 fathoms), Maine (Gulf of Maine; Muscongus Bay near Hog Island, 2 fathoms), Massachusetts (Woods Hole region; Martha's Vineyard; Sandwich, Cape Cod; Hadley Harbor, Naushon Island; Vineyard Sound, 13 fathoms), Rhode Island (Narragansett Bay), Maryland (Rum Harbor, Chincoteague Bay), North Carolina (Beau- fort), Georgia (Sapelo Island). DISTRIBUTION.?Norway to France, Madeira, Mediterranean, South Africa, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Georgia. Low water to 30 fathoms; sexual stolons at surface. Autolytus alexandri Malmgren, 1867 FiGUEE 37, f,g Slephanosyllis ornata Verrill, 1874a, p. 132, pi. 4, fig. 1. Autolytus alexandri Verrill, 1881, p. 292, pi. 12, fig. 8.?Haxtman, 1942b, p. 13; 1944a, p. 338, pL 13, fig. 11; 1945, p. 17, pi. 2, fig. 11.?Miner, 1950, p. 294, pi. 96.?Pettibone, 1954, p. 246; 1956a, p. 555. Proceraea {Slephanosyllis) ornata Webster and Benedict, 1887, p. 724. Autolytus verrilli Grainger, 1954, p. 513.?Berkeley and Berkeley. 1966a, p. 236. DESCRIPTION.?Stem form length up to IS mm., width up to 0.8 mm., segments up to 82; nuchal epaulettes conspicuous, lanceolate, extending posteriorly on setigers 2-4; a second pair dorsal cirri about as long as lateral antennae and upper pair tentacular cirri, rest of dorsal cirri rather irregular in length, longer and shorter, some as long as or longer than body width; body colorless or transversely banded with reddish to brownish granules, may be 2 bands per seg- ment, with dorsal ciliated transverse bands; sexual buds produced singly (?), with head forming between setigers 25 and 26 (according to Hartman, 1945). Female stolon with 14 prenatatory, 18-30 natatory, 10-63 post- natatory setigers; nuchal epaulettes on first 3 setigers; eggs in 2-lobed egg sac. Male stolon with 14 prenatatory, 27-37 natatory, 11-23 postnatatory setigers; 4 pairs of testes in setigers 10-13 (Moore, Ms.). BIOLOGY.?Found at low water in tide pools, on pile scrapings among large barnacles. Dredged on bottoms of mud, sand, gravel, stones, rocks, with algae, sponges, bryozoans, hydroids, ascidians (as sandy Amaroecium), worm tubes, and shells. Sexual stolons found at surface in March and April (Massachusetts), in June (Gulf of St. Lawrence, June 27, 1953, June 1, 1954), in June to August (Canadian Arctic, Grainger, 1954). 148 U.S. NATIONAL ATDSEUM BULLETIN 227 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Maine (between Barter and Hodgdon Islands, Boothbay Harbor region), Massachusetts (Georges Bank; Vineyard Sound; off Kam Island, Woods Hole, April 6 and 12, 1883, v. N. Edwards, male stolon at surface; Eel Pond, Woods Hole, female stolon with egg sac, at surface, March 3, 1956, M. Gray). DisTBiBUTiON.?Scattered records in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Labrador to North Carolina, Bering Sea to Washington. Low water to 123.5 fathoms; sexual forms at surface. Family Nereidae ( = Lycoridae) Body usually elongate, cylindrical, attenuated posteriorly. Pro- atomium distinct, suboval to subpyriform, with 4 eyes (rarely absent), 2 frontal antennae, 2 biarticulated palps (fig. 45a). First or tentacu- lar segment usually apodous and achaetous; tentacular cirri usually 4 pairs (rarely 3 pairs, as in Lycastopsis). Except for the first 2 setigers, parapodia usually biramous (uniramous in some, as Ly- castopsis), with dorsal and ventral cirri, with varying degrees of de- velopment of extra tonguelike extensions or ligules. Setae usually compound spinigers and falcigers. Pygidium with pair of anal cirri. Proboscis (fig. 45,c-e) strong, muscular, eversible, differentiated into oral (proximal) and maxillary (distal) rings, terminating distally in a pair of horny falcate jaws that are toothed along the concave edge. The areas on the maxillary ring are, by convention, numbered from I to IV (dorsal median group i, 2 dorsolaterals ii, ventral median III, 2 ventrolaterals iv), those of the oral ring v-viii (median dorsal v, 2 dorsolaterals vi, median ventral vii, 2 ventrolaterals VIII, vil-viil more or less continuous). The areas of the proboscis may be naked or provided with soft papUlae (aa in Ceratocephale, fig. 42a), smaU coniblike denticles or pbctinae (as in Platynereis, fig. 43,/,?(), or conical horny denticles or paragnaths (as in Nereis, fig. 45,c-e). The proboscis or pharynx is often everted or may be readily observed by a short incision near the midventral line of the tentacular segment. At maturity, many nereids undergo a kind of metamorphosis, undergoing profound structural modifications, referred to as the epitokous phase or heteronereis stage. They become much better swimmers than the atokous or nereid form and may become pelagic when discharging their sex products. Epitoky varies from only slightly modified swarmers to sexually dimorphic male and female heteronereids in which the body goes through marked changes, such as: the eyes become extremely enlarged and may cause marked changes in the shape of the prostomium, and usually associated with greater sensitivity to light; body divides into 2-3 distinct regions. POLTCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 149 a shorter anterior region with the normal type of setae and a more posterior larger region in which the segments are compressed and flattened anteroposteriorly like an accordion, with extra development of thin foliaceous lamellar plates on the parapodial lobes (fig. 44c), the normal setae being replaced by a special type of compound homo- gomph swimming setae in which the blades are flattened, paddlelike (fig. 44?); with or without a third most posterior region or "tail," with the usual type of parapodia. In the males, the anterior dorsal and ventral cirri are often modified and clubbed, with curved and pointed tips (fig. 43A). In the females, the cirri may be slightly modified. In the modified region in the males, the dorsal cirri are denticulate or crenulate on their lower side and the anal segment is furnished with long to short papillae (so-called anal rosette). The transformation into the heteronereis is often accompanied by extensive histolysis of certain muscles of the body wall and of the digestive tube and by reorganization of the musculature. The heteronereids may swim to the surface in swarms. AH degrees of variation in reproductive pattern are found in the group, as indicated in the following (for more details, see systematic discussion; also see Reish, 1957, and Clark, 1961): (1) Reproduction in the atokous stage, without epitokous or heter- onereis stages, as (a) Nereis arenaceodonta (includes N. caudxita), males and females pair up in tube for lengthy period, where eggs are laid, fertilized, and then incubated by the male; (b) Nereis diversicolor, males much less numerous than females ; they show a type of pseudo- copulation where numerous females move to a mature male and surround him, when the eggs and sperm are given out, followed by fertilization and development in the tube ; (c) Nereis limnicola Johnson (includes N. lighti Hartman; see Smith, 1958, 1959), an internal self-fertilizing hermaphrodite; viviparous, producing young of about 20 segments. (2) Reproduction by male and female swarmers, forming only slightly modified epitokes but not distinct heteronereids, the adults swarming on the flats or at the surface, as Nereis virens and Nereis iaponica. (3) Reproduction by markedly modified heteronereids; the adults abandon their tubes or burrows and swarm at the surface, the males pursuing the females. This may be followed by: external fertili- zation, where the sexual elements are emptied directly into the water and where fertilization and development ensue, as in Nereis succinea, Nereis 'pel?gica, Platynereis dumerilii (at Naples) ; or internal fertili- zation by a unique copulatory mechanism, as in Platynereis dumerilii megalops in the Woods Hole region. Both males and females die after spawning and the ova give rise to planktogenic larvae. 150 U.S. NATIOIV'AL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 The nereids are typically free living, mostly living in crevices and burrows, where they construct galleries or a tube. Their general pat- tern of activity centers around the tube (Clark, 1959). The terminology for the different types of setae in the nereids is as follows: (a) Compound homogomph spiniger, distal tip of shaft even, blade ends in slender fine tip (fig. 42e); (b) compound heterogomph spiniger, distal tip of shaft uneven, blade ends in fine slender tip (fig. 42/); (c) compound homogomph falciger, distal tip of shaft even, blade short, ending in blunt tip (fig. 42A) ; (d) compound heterogomph falciger, distal tip of shaft uneven, blade ending in blunt, usually hooked tip; blades may be relatively long (fig. 44a) or short (fig. 42(j); (e) compound homogomph cultrate or swimming seta, blade flattened, paddlelike, characteristic of heteronereids or epitokes (fig. 44e); (f) simple falciger, seta with blunt tip, formed by partial or complete fusion of blade to shaft (fig. 44A). All four genera represented have the body vermiform, cylindrical, with numerous segments; the first or tentacular segment achaetous and apodous, with tentacular cirri 3 to 4 pairs. Key to the New England Genera of Nereidae 1. Parapodia essentially uniramous, notopodium reduced to an aciculuin near the base of the dorsal cirrus; without ligules (fig. 41??). Tentacular cirri 3 pairs (fig. 41ii). Proboscis smooth, without paragnaths or papillae, Lycastopsis (p. 150) Parapodia biramous (except for the first 2 pairs), with Ugules (fig. 42,b-d). Tentacular cirri 4 pairs (fig. 45a). Proboscis with paragnaths or papillae . 2 2. From the third setiger on, each parapodium with ventral cirri double (fig. 426). Without notopodial Hgules. Proboscis without paragnaths, with soft conical papillae on oral ring (fig. 42a) Ceratocephale (p. 152) Ventral cirri single. With notopodial ligules 3 3. Proboscis with small pectiniform denticles or paragnaths (fig. 43, f,g). Pro- stomium suboval (fig. 43a). Sexual heteronereids with antennae and palps turned ventrally, usually not visible dorsally (fig. 43A). Platynereis (p. 154) Proboscis with conical paragnaths (fig. 45,c-e). Prestomium subpyriform, widest posteriorly, narrowed and rounded anteriorly (fig. 45a). Sexual heteronereids, when present, with antennae and palps visible dorsally. Nereis (p. 160) Genus Lycastopsis Augener, 1922 Type (laonotypy) : Lycastopsis bevmeri Augener, 1922 ;=i. pontica (Bobretzky, 1872). Contains only one New England species. Lycastopsis pontica (Bobretzky, 1872) FIGURE 41 Lycastis pontica Bobretzky, 1872, p. 1, pi. 14, figs. 1-4. Lycastis liltoralis Grube, 1872, p. 47. Lycastopsi? beumeri Augener, 1922, p. 42.?^Wesenberg-Lund, 1958, p. 14, figs. 9-10. POIiYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 151 Lycastopsis augeneri Okuda, 1937a, p. 306, fig. 2.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 204, figs. Q2,a-d. Lycastopsis tecolutlensis Rioja, 1946, p. 211, pi. 1, figs. 7-12.?Hartman, 1951, p, 44. Namanereis quadraticeps Hartman, 1959b, p. 162 (part?). DESCHIPTION.?Length up to 57 mm., width up to 1 mm., segments up to 125. Body slender, stiff, turgid, widest in the middle, tapering toward both ends, flattened ventrally, strongly arched dorsally. Prostomium (fig. 416) suboval, wider than long. Frontal antennae short, conical. Biarticulate palps short, thick. Two pairs of eyes on posterior half of prostomium, anterior pair larger. Tentacular seg- ment achaetous, about samo length or slightly shorter than the follow- ing segments; it may overlap the posterior part of the prostomium, concealing the posterior pair of eyes. Tentacular cirri 3 pairs, without basal joints, short, not extending beyond the palps, widest basally, tapering distally. Parapodia (fig. ild) conical, essentially uniramous. With a dorsal aciculum, without notosetae, with ventral aciculum. Compound neurosetae of 2 kinds: few (2-3) heterogomph spinigers and more FIGURE 41.?Nereidae, Lycaslopsis pontica: a, habit sketch; h, dorsal view anterior end; c, dorsal view posterior end; d, parapodium; e, neurosetae, compound heterogomph spiniger and falciger. 152 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 numerous (4-8) heterogomph falcigers (fig. 41?). Dorsal cirri short, conical, extending only slightly beyond the tips of the neuropodia; ventral cirri short, conical. Anal cirri short, conical (fig. 41c). Proboscis without paragnaths, with a pair of amber-colored jaws, each with about 8 teeth (6-8). Color, in life: white to slightly yellowish to yellowish green, with prominent red dorsal and ventral blood vessels; setae and acicula dark; also dark jaws show through; in alcohol: colorless. BIOLOGY.?A very active worm, coiling up tightly like a spring, in this respect similar to Glycera and Arabella (fig. 41a). They are found high intertidally, crawling under larger rocks overlaying coarse gravelly sand, along with pseudoscorpions, oligochaetes, amphipods, etc. In Japan, it was found in the littoral zone near the high tide mark under decaying sea weeds, with the marine oligochaete Pachy- d?lus japonicus Yamaguchi. Judging from its habitat, it would be expected to be euryhaline. It may be found in brackish areas. It is a primitive aberrant nereid, perhaps a representative of a relic fauna. Other members of the genus are found in tropical regions, some are estuarine, some are found in fresh water. It is probably hermaph- roditic as are other members of the genus ; some contain very large oval eggs. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Massachusetts (Woods Hole region, Gan- sett, Juniper Point, Little Harbor, Eel Pond, R. Bond and R. Howard, collectors). DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Woods Hole region), Virginia (Norfolk), West Indies, Brazil, Black Sea, Mediterranean, central California, eastern Mexico (Vera Cruz), north Japan. In littoral zone near high tide mark and in estuaries. Genus Ceratocephale Malmgren, 1867 Chaunorhynchus Chamberlin, 1919, new name for Ceratocephale Malmgren (thought to be preoccupied).?Not Cerafocephala Warder (1838, Crustacea). Type (monotypy): Ceratocephale lov?ni Mahngren, 1867. Contains only one New England species. Ceratocephale lovent Malmgren, 1S67 FIGURE 42,a,t> Ceratocephale lov?ni Malmgren, 1867, p. 61, pi. 5, fig. 33.?Heinen, 1911, p. 62, pi. 1, figs. 11-15. Ceratocephale websieri Verrill, 1879, p. 172. Ceratacephala near loveni Mclntosh, 1902, p. 258, pi. 6. Chaunorhynchus loveni Hartman, 1942b, p. 49, figs. 83-84. Ceratocephala loveni Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 39.?Usehakov, 1958a, p. 82, fig. 3.? Eliason, 1962, p 252. DESCRIPTION.?^Length more than 25 mm. (none complete), width up to 7 mm. Body elongate, widest about setigers 3-7, tapering POLTCHAETE WORMSj PART 1 153 -po FiGURi 42.?Nereidae, a-b, Ceralocephale louent: a, dorsal view anterior end, with proboscis partially everted; b, parapodium from anterior region, c, Nereis nonata, parapodium from anterior region, d-h, Nereis pel?gica: d, parapodium from anterior region; e, compound homogomph spiniger; /, compound heterogomph spiniger; g, compound heterogomph fakiger; k, compound homogomph faltiger. ?, Nereis grayi, parapodium gradually anteriorly and posteriorly. Prostomium (fig. 42(i) broader tlian long, incised anteriorly between the bases of the antennae, with a median groove extending posteriorly. Eyes lacking. Two thick palps and 2 more slender frontal antennae present, the palps and antennae subequal in length and fused at their bases, both jointed, the terminal joints short and pointed. Tentacular segment large, swollen. 154 TT.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 apodous and achaetous, with 4 pairs slender, tapered tentacular cirri. Parapodia (fig. 42?) biramous. Notopodia with a conical setigerous lobe with a thick bundle of homogomph spinigers (not spinous). Neuropodia with a conical setigerous lobe and a lower ligule. Upper neurosetae similar to notosetae; lower neurosetae slightly heterogomph spinigers with spines along the cutting edge; setae pale yellow, in thick bundles; acicula dark. Dorsal cirri slender, tapering; dorsal cirrophores gradually elongated on setigers 9 to 26 or so (may be filled with sex products), when the whiplike dorsal cirri may overlap medially. Ventral cirri single on first 2 uniramous setigers, double on rest. Proboscis (fig. 42a) large, muscular, with 2 jaws light brown, curved, with inner edge serrulate (about 11 teeth); without paragnaths; with soft conical papillae on oral ring only, consisting dorsally of 3 papUIae and ventrally of 7 papillae in a row followed by 3 smaller ones in a second row. Color, in life (Verrill, 1879): pale brownish or pinkish, dorsal cirrophores and bases of parapodia bright red, setigerous lobes greenish, setae dark at base. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of soft mud and mud with coarse sand and gravel. MATEHIAL EXAMINED.?Off Nova Scotia (43?48' N., 63?46' W.) to off Virginia (37?12' N., 47?20' W.), in 25 to 1,168 fathoms. Albatross stations. DISTRIBUTION.?Sweden, Norway, Denmark, Iceland, North Sea, Gulf of St. Lawrence to off Virginia, Okhotsk Sea. In 25 to 1,168 fathoms. Genus Platynereis Kinberg, 1866 Nectonereis Verrill, 1873a; type (monotypy): Nectonereis megalops Vemll, 1873a; = male epitoke Platynereis dumerilii megalops (Verrill, 1873a). Type (designated by Hartman, 1949): Platynereis magalhaerisis Kinberg, 1866; = P. australis (Schmarda, 1861). Contains only one New England species. Platynereis dumerilii (Audouin and Milnc-Edwards, 1833b) FIGURE 43 Nectonereis megalops Verrill and Smith, 1874, pp. 146, 159, 298, pi. 12, figs. 62, 63. Nereis alacris Verrill, 1879, p. 171. Nereis megalops Verrill, 1879, p. 172; 1881, pp. 301, 320, pi. 5, figs. 1-2; 1882, p. 370.?Andrews, 1891a, p. 284.?Wilson, 1892, p. 371.^Bumpus, 1898o, p. 855.?Miner, 1950, p. 320, pi. 104. Nereis dumerilii Webster, 1879, p. 234.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 621.?Lillie and Just, 1913, p. 158,?Hoagland, 1919, p. 574.?Just, 1929, p. 307.?Treadwell, in Cowles, 1930, p. 342.?Miner, 1950, p. 320, pi. 104.? Wesenberg-Lund, 1951, p. 43. Platynereis megalops Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 621.?Just, 1914, p. 201.? Costello, et al., 1957, p. 89.?Hartman, 1959a, p. 278.?Clark, 1961, p. 216. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 155 Plaiynereis dumerilii Fauvet, 1923, p. 359, fig. 141,a-/; 1953, p. 218, fig. lll,a-/; 1955, p. 7; 1957a, p. 5; 1957b, p. 214.?Herpin, 1926, pp. 17, 39, 91, 112, 119.?Hartman, 1942a, p. 1?0; 1944a, p. 339, pi. 16, figs. 3, 7-8, pi. 23, fig. 2; 1944c, p. 17; 1945, p. 22; 1951, p. 47; 1956, p. 281.?Thorson, 1946, p. 67, fig. 31.?St0p-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 62.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1949, p. 288.?Day, 1953, p. 429; 1960, p. 324.?Andrew and Andrew, 1953, p. 9.?Rasmussen, 1956, p. 59.?Southward, 1956, p. 263.?Allen, 1957, p. 62.?Fauvel and RuUier, 1957, p. 79; 1959, p. 52.?Rioja, 1958, p. 257.?Banse, 1959, p. 438.? Clark, 1960, p. 20. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 76 mm., width up to 6 mm., segments up to 90. Body cylindrical, tapered posteriorly. Prostomium (fig. ? noLi (2) ? neLi C ^ VC FIGURE 43.?Nereidae, Platynereis dumerilii: a, dorsal view anterior end; b, parapodium from anterior region; c, parapodium from middle region; d, notopodial homogomph falciger from middle region; e, ncuropodial heterogomph fakiger from middle region;/, everted proboscis, dorsal view; g, same, ventral view; k, dorsal view anterior end of male heter- onereid, bases of tentacular cirri only present. 569457?63 11 166 U.S. ?s. TONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 43a) suboval, with short bulbous palps and slender pointed antennae, slightly longer than the palps. With 4 rather large eyes. With a pair of ciliated nuchal organs posterior to the eyes and which may be pigmented. Tentacular segnaent slightly longer than the following, with a more or less conspicuous middorsal anterior extension. Ten- tacular cirri with long cirrophores, with long slender styles, the longest extending to setigers 6-20. Parapodia with notosetae between two notopodial ligules, a neuro- podial setigerous lobe with upper and lower groups of neurosetae, a lower neuropodial ligule. Dorsal cirri longer than the ligules; ventral cirri about as long as the neuropodial ligule. In the anterior region, the parapodia (fig. 436) are formed of 4 short, rounded, closely appressed lobes. The notosetae are homogomph spinigers. The upper group of neurosetae are homogomph spinigers and hetero- gomph falcigers with short appendages, the lower group of neurosetae are heterogomph spinigers and falcigers. In the middle and posterior regions, the parapodia (fig. 43c) are formed of 4 conical lobes, more elongate and tapering than in the anterior segments, the lobes rather widely separated, each with 2 large, more or less conspicuous dark- colored glands at the bases of the dorsal cirri. Beginning on about setiger 20, some of the lower notosetae are replaced by a few (1-4) homogomph falcigers with a recurved tip (fig. 43d). The neurosetae are similar to those of the anterior segments except that the hetero- gomph falcigers have short blades with a recurved tip (fig. 43?). The acicula are black. Anal cirri 2, about as long as the tentacular cirri. Proboscis (fig. 43,/,i?) with pale amber-colored jaws, each with 5-13 teeth, with paragnaths in the form of very small, fine, pectinate denticles (may be very pale and difl?cult to detect). Denticles absent from areas i, ir, and v; group iir, small transverse mass of 3 groups, each with 1, 2, or 3 rows; group iv, several parallel pectinate rows (3-5 rows); group vi, 2-3 curved rows; groups vii-virr, 5-7 masses of 1-2 rows each (in small specimens, may be difficult to see separate rows; in heteronereids, may form a fused mass). Color in life: iridescent, bright olive green tinged with orange-red "freckles" or dots; yellow with greenish spots and whitish splotches (specimens on gulfweed) ; young translucent, nearly white with some red specks on surface; color variable, greenish, yellowish, pink, reddish with violet chromatophores, the pigment may be uniformly spotted or somewhat banded (Fauvel). Color, preserved: may show dorsally dark bands of dots and darker spots at the bases of the parapodia, 2 spots basal to the dorsal cirri, in the tips of the ligules, on the bases of the ventral cirri and scattered spots ventrally. Both male and female heteronereids show marked changes from the atokous form in that the eyes become greatly enlarged; the antennae POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 157 and palps are directed ven trally and are not visible dors ally (fig. i3h) ; body is divided into 2 regions, anterior region with setae similar to atokous form and posterior region tapering gradually, with swimming setae (since the notopodial homogomph falcigerous setae of the atokous form begins around setiger 20 and are replaced by swimming setae up to the posterior end, they will not usually be found in the hoteronereids). Extra thin flattened lamellae are on the parapodia and bases of the dorsal and ventral cirri. Pygidium with a pair of midventral cirrophores with the anal cirri, or cirri may be broken off. Table 1, page 158, shows how the sexually dimorphic males and females differ. BioiiOGY.?^The species, including male and female heteronereids massed with eggs and many small ones, is particularly associated with algal masses (Fucus) and floating seaweed (Sargassum). It is very active in all its motions, swimming rapidly. It forms tenacious, transparent, parchment-like or weakly chitinized tubes on the algae, in which foreign material, such as sand grains or fragments of bryo- zoans, may be incorporated irregularly. It is found in crevices of rocks, on pilings, wharfs, among algae, sponges, and hydroids (as Pennaria). It is dredged in rather shallow waters on shelly bottoms, among bryozoan nodules, ascidians and sponge clumps. It feeds on algae. The heteronereids are found at the surface as well as the young of all sizes from 6-8 segments up to 10 mm. or more in length. In the Woods Hole region, sexual forms are found at the sm-face during the summer months from June into September (Bumpus, 1898c, Verrill, 1882, Wilson, 1892). According to Just (1914) in the Woods Hole region, they show lunar periodicity, swarming during the dark of the moon during the months of July and August. At Beaufort, North Carolina, they are found in June and July (Hartman, 1945). At Naples, they are found swarming from October to May, tending to center around the time of the first and third quarters of the moon (Lillie and Just, 1913). The species is noted for its extreme reproductive plasticity. Some of the reports may be due to confusion of species, due to difficulty in detecting distinguishing morphological characters or due to somewhat abnormal conditions. The following have been reported for the species, mostly studied in the Mediterranean (Moquin-Tandon, 1869; Ilerpin, 1926; Haucnschild, 1951): A. Epitokous, heteronereid forms, metamorphosing into sexually dimorphic males and females which become pelagic and swarm at the surface; the eggs have relatively less yolk (with few relatively large yolk droplets, eggs under 180 ? in diameter, according to Haucnschild, 1951) and develop into planktogenic swimming trocho- 158 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 TABLE 1.?Differences between sexually dimorphic males and females in P. dumerilii. Chatatta? Male hetermereid Female keteronpeid Size Smaller, due to greater Larger; 31-47 mm. long. compression of seg- about 90 segments ments; lS-24 mm. long, about 90 seg- ments Color Greenish anteriorly, Pale greenish or yellow- pinkish to reddish ish, often nearly more posteriorly white Swims Rapidly, with jerky Slowly, usually at movements, rotating greater depths. in spirals Prostomium Elongate-oval, longer Oval, wider than long, than wide; anterior anterior pair eyes pair eyes very large, larger, directed directed ventraliy, laterally (not as posterior pair smaller. large as in male) ; directed dorsally posterior pair di- (fig. 43/i) rected dorsally Dorsal cirri of First 7 pairs clubbed. First 4 pairs slightly anterior region with slender oblique terminal part, becom- ing progressively longer posteriorly (seventh about double the length of the first) modified Ventral cirri of First 4 pairs clubbed, First 4 pairs slightly anterior region larger than following modified Number of setigers Usually 14 (12-15) Usually 21 (20-27) in anterior region (prenatatory) Dorsal cirri of Crenulate on lower Smooth, not crenulate posterior modified margin or natatory region Neuropodial lamellar Very large, entire (not Smaller, bilobed, much plate of modified bilobed), thin, flat. shorter than neuro- or natatory region about as long as neurosetae setae Anal segment or An anal disc with a Bulbous, without pygidium middorsal extension and a circle of papil- lae (both may be variable in shape as they may be ex- tended or contracted) papillae Sex products Sperm massed in an- Whole body massed terior region with large yolky eggs POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 159 phores and forming 3-segmented pelagic larvae with long compound setae. Two modifications are: (1) A noncopulatory external fertilization, as reported by Just (1929) and others for P. dumerilii at Naples. Around the slowly swimming female, the active males move with ever increasing rapidity and more closely set spirals. The males then discharge their sperm, into which the female discharges her eggs, and then the adults sink to the bottom of the sea. (2) A remarkable copulatory mechanism followed by internal fertilization, as described by Just (1914) for Platynereis megalops in the Woods Hole region (P. megalops seems indistinguishable morpho- logically from the Mediterranean P. dumerilii and has been put into synonomy herein, as has been done by others; it may be, however, that the species are distinct; megalops should probably at least be considered as a subspecies). The small, reddish males appear first, swimming with great rapidity in an ever narrowing circle while the larger, pale yellow females appear later. As the male comes in the vicinity of the female, he swims very rapidly in spirals, entwining the female. The female receives the anal segments of the male in her jaws, the sperm are swallowed and pass through lesions of the pharynx into the body cavity; the sexual adults separate and the fertilized eggs stream from the posterior segments of the female through lesiona of the body wall (about 6 seconds after the female has received the anal segments of the male; previously the body wall of the female has become extremely thin and the digestive tract has become but a rem- nant) ; the female sinks from view and apparently dies. B. Atokous nereid form, without metamorphosis ; yolky eggs (over 250 ii in diameter, filled compactly with smau yolk globules, according to Hauenschild, 1951) are deposited in the tube and incubated by the male; nonpelagic neridogenic larvae of three segments leave the egg membranes and creep away. The atokous forms are protandric hermaphrodites, described originally for Nereis massiliensis Moquin- Tandon, 1869. Thus the following may be found: (1) Small greenish "males" filled with ripe sperm and small unripe eggs; (2) Larger yellowish females with yolky eggs (the sperm usually disappear by the time the eggs ripen). When "males" are present, the females shed the eggs within the tube where they develop, incubated by the "male" (Herpin, 1926); the female dies sometime after spawning; in the protandric "male," the eggs mature, and it becomes a female. According to Herpin (1926) and others, this is to be considered a reproductive phase of P. dumerilii. According to Hauenschild (1951), P. dume?lii and P. massiliensis should be considered as distinct, the former reproduc- 160 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 ing only as bisexual heteronereids, spawning at the surface and producing planktogenic larvae; the latter reproducing as protandric hermaphroditic atokous individuals, spawning within the tube and producing nonpelagic nereidogenic larvae. Rarely has viviparity been reported, perhaps as an accidental consequence of the unusually long survival of sperm in the body cavity of "hermaphroditic females," and of self-fertilization taking place. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Massachusetts (Buzzards Bay, Vineyard Sound on gulf-weed; Martha's Vineyard, Gay Head, Lagoon Pond; Woods Hole region, Eel Pond, Fisheries Dock and Steamship Wharf, Nobska, Stony Beach, North Falmouth; Elizabeth Islands; Cape Cod Canal; Wellfleet, Cape Cod), Rhode Island (off Newport), Long Island Sound, Maryland (lower half Chesapeake Bay, southwest Ocean City, Foxhill Levels, Assateague Island, Chineoteague Bay), Georgia, North Carolina (Beaufort), Puerto Rico (Caballo Blanco and Mona Island Reef, Parguera, heteronereids, M. J. Allen), Barbados (Pelican Island). DiSTHiBUTioN.?A cosmopolitan form with wide geographic distribution in warm seas. Massachusetts (Cape Cod), south of Newfoundland (surface) to Florida, Gulf of Mexico, West Indies, Brazil, Iceland, Faroes, Scandinavia to ?Yance, Mediterranean, Iranian Gulf, Red Sea, Indian Ocean, central Pacific (Bikini), West and South Africa. In low water to 71 fathoms; young and sexual epitokes in surface waters; all stages in floating seaweed (Sargassum). Genus Nereis Linn?, 1758 Type (designated by Hartman, 1949): Nereis pel?gica Linn?, 1758. Subgenus Neanthes Kinberg, 1866; cniend. Hartman, 1940 Type (designated by Hartman, 1959a): Neanthes vaalii Kinberg, 1866. Subgenus Hediste Malmgren, 1867 Type (monotypy): Hediste diversicolor (O.F. M?ller, 1776). In Neanthes Kinberg, as originally defined and followed by Fauvel and others, all the areas of the proboscis are equipped with hard and discrete paragnaths, while in Nereis Linn?, sensu stricto, 1 or several groups of paragnaths are lacking. The distinction may fail when considering the variability within a single species, as has been shown for Nereis virens by Turnbull (1876) and Berkeley and Berkeley (1954). Based on the types, the definitions of the genera have been revised by Hartman (1940, pp. 219-220). It seems advisable to denote the close relationship of the North Atlantic A'', diversicolor O.F. M?ller, N. limnicola Johnson from the North American Pacific POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 161 coast (including N. lighti Hartman), and N. jap?nica Izuka from the Japanese Pacific (see Smith, 1958, 1959) by including them in the same subgenus. The 3 species are morphologically very similar, denoting a possible common ancestry but they may be distinguished by reproductive habit and the morphology of the sexually mature individuals. Also they are reproductively and geographically iso- lated. Hartman (1959a, 1960a) has referred them all to Neanthes diversicolor, an action which ignores the difilerences in reproductive pattern as well as other differences pointed out by Smith. The species of Nereis represented have the body elongate, cylin- drical, tapering anteriorly and posteriorly. Prostomium (fig. 45,a,e) subpyriform in shape, widest posteriorly, tapering and rounded an- teriorly, with 4 eyes on the posterior half. Tentacular segment slightly longer than or up to double the length of the following seg- ments, with 4 pairs of tentacular cirri. Pair of anal cirri of variable length. Key to the New England Subgenera and Specie8 of Nereis 1. Preacicular notopodial lobe elongated, thiis provided with 3 notopodial ligules (flg. i4:,a,f,g,i). Notopodia with homogomph spinigerous setae only (fig. 42,e), without falcigerous setae 2 Without elongated preacicular notopodial lobes, thus provided with 2 notopodial ligules (fig. 42,c,d). Middle and posterior notopodia provided with homogomph ialcigers in addition to spinigers (fig. 42A) (subgenus NEREIS sensu stricto) 5 2. Supraacicular neuropodial bundle of setae in posterior region with homogomph spinigers and few (1-3) heavy specialized falcigers with end pieces wholly or partially fused to shafts (fig. 4ih) (subgenus HEDISTE) . Upper notopodial ligule triangular, not especially enlarged (?g. 44^). Without heteronereid stage; spawns in burrows N. (Hediste) diversicolor (p. 174) Without fused neurosetae in upper bundle of posterior neuropodia (subgenus NEANTHES) 3 3. Basal or oral ring of proboscis with continuous broad band of small denticles (fig. 45e). Without heteronereis stage. N. (Neanthes) arenaceodonta (p. 162) Oral ring of proboscis with denticles in groups, not forming a continuous band (fig. 46c). With or without heteronereis stage 4 4. Parapodia greatly modified in posterior region-?upper dorsal ligules become elongate, straplike, with dorsal cirri terminal (fig. 445). With greatly modified heteronereis stage, swarms at surface. N. (Neanthes) succinea (p. 165) Parapodia not greatly modified anterior to posterior. Upper dorsal ligules broadly triangular, much larger than the other ligules (fig. 44/). With slightly modified heteronereid stage, swarms on flats or at surface. N. (Neanthes) virens (p. 170) 5. Proboscis with paragnaths few in number, lacking entirely on areas vii-viir. Parapodial ligules sharply conical (fig. 42i) . . N. (Nereis) grayi (p. 183) Proboscis with paragnaths more numerous, present on areas vii-viii ... 6 6. Parapodial ligules short, thick, evenly rounded (fig. 42d). Body uniformly pigmented, not banded. Paragnaths of areas vii-viu with 1-2 irregular 162 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 rows of larger paragnaths followed by several rows of small ones, diminishing in size posteriorly . N. (Nereis) pel?gica (p. 179) Parapodial ligules triangular to conical, gradually tapering to a broad tip (fig. 42c), Body usually transversely banded (may be faint or absent in young specimens). Paragnaths of areas vn-viii with continuous row of larger paragnaths followed by a wide band of small subequal ones. N. (Nereis) zonata (p. 181) JVcreis {Neanthes) arenaceodonta Moore, 1903c FIGURES 44i, 45e Spio caudatus Delle Chiaje, 1822, pi. 28, figs. 10, 16; 1825, pp. 403, 432. Not (Savigny, MS.) Lamarck, 1818, p. 319. Nereis {Neanthes) caudata Delle Chiaje, 1841, pp. 96, 104, pi. 102, figs. 10, 15.? Fauvel, 1923, p. 347, fig. 135, a-e; 1955, p. 7.?Herpin, 1926, pp. 18, 101, 120.~Day, 1953, p. 425; 1960, p. 324. Nerds arenaceodonta Moore, 1903e, p. 720, pi. 40, figs. 1-10.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 620.?Benham, 1916, p. 134, pi. 46, figs. 1-3. Neanthes cricognatha Knox, 1951, p. 217, pi. 45, figs. 6-8. Neanthes caudata Renaud, 1956, p. 16, fig. 11.?Reish, 1957, p. 216, figs. 1-9; 1959, p. 81.?Rioja, 1958, p. 255. DESCKIPTION.?^Length up to 70 mm., width up to 4 mm., segments up to 75. Prostomium (fig. 45e) about as long as broad, strongly convex anteriorly. Tentacular cirri relatively short, longest reach setigers 3-9. Parapodia (fig. 44i) relatively long, similar throughout the length of the body. Notopodia with 3 ligules, upper one larger, triangular; middle or presetal and lower ones subequal, pointed. Neuropodia with 2 slender, pointed ligules, postsetal and subsetal. Acicula colorless. Notosetae a fan-shaped bundle of homogomph spinigers; both upper and lower groups of neurosetae homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers with relatively long hooked blades. Dorsal and ventral cirri subequal, shorter than the upper notopodial ligule. Proboscis (fig. 45e) with brown curved jaws, each with 6-15 teeth. Paragnaths of oral or basal ring (areas v-viii) forming a continuous broad band; area i, an elliptical group of denticles; area ii, crescentic groups; area in, an elongate oval group; area iv, triangular groups. Color, in life: white, transparent, pale yellow or bright pink with brownish or purple (Fauvel); color, preserved: splotched with brownish or bluish on prostomium and first few segments, in bases of parapodia and ligules, the pigment may be irregularly scattered in the body or may bo somewhat banded. BIOLOGY.?Found at low water in muddy sand and sand, on Diopaira tubes, in mussel beds, and with sponges and algae. Pound on drifting algae. Dredged on bottoms of gravel, mud, sand, among tunicates (as sandy Amaroecium). According to Herpin (1926), it is found on the lower side of rocks covered with the green alga Enteromorpha, where these rocks rest on muddy sand and even quite compact clay; it constructs tubes with thin walls but often incrusted with mud and POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 163 debris, the tubes adhering feebly to the rocks. Herpin found that, when available, it feeds on the Enieromorpha as well as on diatoms and filamentous algae and that it may occasionally be carnivorous, capable of attacking and digesting prey larger than itself. Although small, N. arenaceodonta shows extreme agility, swimming easily and rapidly. It has been found swimming at the surface in Vineyard Sound in August (1882, 1902, 1904) and October (1882). It is taken at the surface in both the immature and mature condition. It lacks a heteronereis stage. Specimens were found with relatively few large yolky eggs, about 9 eggs per segment and nearly as great in diameter ? ?^ ^' h FIGURE 44,?Nereidae, a-i, Nereis luccinea: a, parapodium from anterior region; b, para- podium from posterior region; c, parapodium from segment 25 of female heteronereid; d, compound lieterogomph falciger; e, swimming seta of heteronereid, /, Nereis virent, parapodium from middle region of body, g-h. Nereis diversicolor: g, parapodium from anterior region; h, simple neuropodial falcigerous seta from posterior region, i, Nereis arenaceodonta, parapodium from middle region. 164 U.S. NATIONAL MUSKTJM BULLETIN 227 as the length of the segment (August 22, 1950, Lackeys Bay, Nona- messet Island, Massachusetts). Herpin (1926), in studying the re- productive habits of the species in the English Channel (Cherbourg, France), found that the eggs are of quite unusual size, at maturity reaching a diameter of 600 fi and filled with abundant yellow yolk in the form of globules of quite small diameter; the sperm are extremely scanty and of quite aberrant form. Spawning is preceded by a long period of at least 4 months of couple formation (beginning at the first of May in Cherbourg). This period is associated with a fighting reaction: a female will fight off other fe- males but is attracted to a male; the males will fight off any males and, while incubating the eggs, any females; the proboscis is everted and the jaws extend to grasp the opposing animal. A male and female con- struct a single cylindrical tube provided with numerous openings, staying side by side and separating only rarely. The eggs are laid and fertilized in the tube, after which the female leaves the tube and apparently dies after a short time. Reish (1957) found that the fe- males either died 2-3 days after egg laying or were eaten by the males. The male remains and incubates the eggs by executing continual regular undulatory movements, assuring the renewal of water over the eggs. The fertilized eggs adhere to one another and to the wall of the tube, the male having arranged the eggs with his proboscis. Freshly laid eggs were molded into a mucoid tube of one egg in thickness by the male, according to Reish ; the males may resume their former fife and may reproduce and incubate larvae more than once. The early development has been followed by Herpin (1926, Cher- bourg, France) and by Reish (1957, southern Cahfornia). They found that it develops into a noncihated embryo, which is unique among the nereids. Herpin found that the larvae hatch from the fertilization membrane after about 11 days (7 days, according to Reish) as a hemispherical larva possessing 3 setigers, with anal cirri, with a mouth but no jaws, and with a large amount of yolk globules. The larvae develop rapidly and, after 30 days (about 21 days, accord- ing to Reish), may possess 20 pairs (17-19 pairs, according to Reish) of parapodia, the reserves being exhausted; they differ from the adult only by the absence of the fourth pair of tentacular cirri. The larvae leave the tube only after the disappearance of the reserves and at a very advanced stage, thus compensating for the small number of eggs. Reish found 143 to 791 larvae per parent tube. They construct mucoid tubes and begin to feed, there being no true planktonic stage. Development is effected in a single year (Reish found that sexual maturity was reached in 2 months and that 5 generations completed their life cycle in the laboratory within a period of 1 year). POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 165 MATERIAL EXAMINED.^?Massachusetts {Albatross III, 41?21' N., 67?59' W., 1955, R. Wigley; Woods Hole region, Vineyard Sound, Naushon Island, Lackeys Bay, Nonaraesset Island, Nobska, North Falmouth, Nantucket Sound; Cape Cod, Provincetown, Wellfleet Harbor, Barnstable), Rhode Island (Newport), New Jersey (Raritan Bay), Maryland (Assateague Island in Chincoteague Bay), low water to 18 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?English Channel to Santander, Mediterranean, Massachusetts (Cape Cod) to Maryland (Chincoteague Bay), Florida, southern California, Mexico, Philippine Islands, Australia, New Zealand, northeastern Tasmania, South Africa, India. In low water to 55 fathoms; surface. Nereis (Neanthea) succinea (Frey and Leuckart, 1847) FIGURES 44,a-e; 45,o-? Nereis limhata Webster, 1879, p. 235, pi. 6, figs. 70-75; 1886, p. 139, pi. 6, figs. 21, 22.?Verrill, 1881, pp. 296, 300, 308, 317, 321, pi. 5, fig. 3.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 718,?-Andrews, 1891a, p. 284.?Wilson, 1892, p. 361.? Bumpus, 1898a, p. 485; 1898b, p. 58; 1898c, p. 850.?Mead, 1900, p. 308.? Wilson, 1900, p. 351.?Lillie and Just, 1913, p. 147.?Sumner, Osburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 621.?Hoagland, 1919, p. 574.-TreadwelJ, in Cowles, 1930, p. 342.?Miner, 1950, p. 322, pi. 105.?Pratt, 1951, p. 330, fig. 454.?Nicoll, 1954, p. 69, fig. 4.?Costello, et al., 1957, p. 83. Nereis (Neanthes) succinea Fauvel, 1923, p. 346, fig. 135 (part); 1936o, p. 312.? Stffp-Bowitz, 1948a, p. 62.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1953, p. 847; 1954, p. 45; 1958, p. 402.?Day, 1933, p. 425; 1957, p. 78; 1960, p. 321.?Newell, 1954, p. 334.?Banse, 1954, p. 160, figs. 1-14.?Tebble, 1955, p. 94, figs. 9-10.? Rasmussen, 1956, p. 59.?Araos, 1957, p. 3.?Fauvel and Rullier, 1957, p. 75; 1959, p. 523.?Clark, 196?, p. 214. Neanthes succinea Hartman, 1938a, p. 79; 1944a, p. 339, pi. 16, figs. 4^6; 1944c, p. 17; 1945, p. 17, pi. 3, figs. 1-2; 1951, p. 45.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1958, p. 27: 1962, p. 78.?Hartmann-Schr?der, 1959, p. 142. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 190 mm., width up to 7 mm., segments up to 160. Tentacular cirri slender, tapering, longest reach setigers 3-8. Parapodia differing much in form from anterior to posterior end. Parapodia of anterior region (fig. 44a) with 3 notopodial ligules, the upper one largest, conical; the lower one smaller; the middle or pre- setal one still shorter. Neuropodium with setigerous lobe, a longer postsetal ligule, and a conical lower ligule. Dorsal cirri do not extend beyond or only slightly beyond the ligules; ventral cirri shorter than the ligules. The parapodia change gradually in form in the middle region. In the posterior region the parapodia (figs. 446, 456) differ markedly in form: the notopodium with the upper dorsal ligule elongated, strap- like, flattened, obliquely truncate distally, with the dorsal cirrus in a terminal position; middle notopodial ligule rudimentary or lacking; lower one short, conical. Neuropodium similar to anterior region 166 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 ?I-OTT sn-snii FIGURE 45.?Nereidae, a-d, Nereis succinea: a, dorsal view anterior end; b, dorsal view posterior end; c, dorsal view extended proboscis showing jaws and general arrangement of paragnaths; d, same, ventral view, e, Nereis arenaceodonta, dorsal view anterior end with proboscis extended. except the postsetal ligule is rudimentary or lacking. Acicula black. Notosetae homogomph spinigers. Upper group o? neurosetae homo- gomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers (fig. 44c?) ; lower group of neurosetae heterogomph spinigers and falcigers. Proboscis (fig. 45, c, d) with light amber-colored jaws, each with 4-9 teeth, with amber-colored denticles usually on all 8 areas: Area i, 1-6 denticles; areas ii and iv, arched groups; area iir, oval group; area V, 1-6 denticles (rarely 0); area vi, oval groups; areas vii-viii, 2-3 irregular rows. Color, in life: brownish anteriorly including darkly POLYCHAETE WOEMS, PART 1 167 pigmented prostomium, greenish, greenish yellow or pale red pos- teriorly, dotted with white, or dark over entire dorsum; color, pre- served: darkly pigmented anteriorly, including prostomium and bases of parapodia. Both male and female heteronereids show marked changes from the atokous form. They are considerably shorter due to the antero- posterior flattening of the segments. The eyes are enlarged and they are attracted to light. Body is divided into 3 regions: anterior region (13-18 setigers) with setae similar to the atokous form; middle or na- tatory region (29^0 setigers) with flattened parapodia with swimming setae, with thin flattened extra lamellae on the parapodial lobes and bases of the dorsal and ventral cirri; a posterior region or "tail" (25-56 setigers) with parapodia similar to the atokous form (this region thus shows the characteristic straplike upper notopodial ligules, although this region may be broken off). The anal segment or pygidium is crenulate, shorter than in the asexual form. Table 2 below shows how the sexually dimorphic males and females differ. TABLE 2.?Differences between sexually dimorphic males and females in N. (Neanthes) succinea Character? Male heteronereid Female heteronereid Size Color Swims Prostomium Dorsal cirri of an- terior region Number of setigers in anterior region (prenatatory) Dorsal cirri of mid- dle modified region Neuropodial lamel- lar plate of modified region Smaller usually; 14-55 mm. long, up to 5 mm. wide Bright red with white posterior end In peculiar swift gy- rating motion or in wide circles; actively pursues female Eyes larger, more bulg- ing, enlarged so as to nearly touch each other First 7 pairs inflated subterminally Usually 15 (13-15) Crenulate on lower side Large, oval, entire, nearly as long as neurosetae Larger usually; 30-75 mm. long, up to 7 mm, wide Paler, often nearly white or pale yellow green More slowly Eyes not quite so en- larged First 5' pairs slightly modified usually 17 (13-18) Smooth, not crenulate Shorter, rounded with short outer tip (fig. 44c) 168 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 BIOLOGY.?The species is notably euryhaline. It is found from moderately high tide line to subintertidal levels, under strictly marine conditions and ascending tidal streams to brackish water where it may be able to withstand considerable flooding of fresh water. Thus it is found in bays, estuaries, marsh ditches, and mangroves. It is found in a great variety of niches in the intertidal area, in oyster beds where it may form burrows in the crevices of the oyster shells (along with Polydora and Hydroides), among barnacles, mussels, and sponge masses. It is found on the under sides of rocks and stones or boards, on pilings of wharfs among barnacles and ascidiaus. It may occur in old tubes of Diopatra, Maldarwpsis, Hydroides, and Polydora. It is found on sandy shores, especially where there is a mixture of mud with the sand, in coarse sand, in stiff muddy sand, in gravelly and shelly mud, in peat, in soft mud of brackish water regions; it may occur in very foul soft mud. It has also been dredged in mud. It forms typically a broad U-shaped burrow, open to the surface at both ends. It can burrow rapidly. It prefers coves and harbors, bays and sounds, not exposed beaches of moving sand; the burrows may be semipermanent or more or less temporary, the worms crawling within the burrows, the anterior end extending out some distance from the burrow and withdrawing back rapidly. It may also live with the head end downward with the posterior end close to the surface or protruding. New burrows are constructed frequently. It is extremely abundant in Great Bay, New Hampshhe and the rivers leading into it. In New Jersey, it is common everywhere in the harbor except in pure sand. It is common in Delaware Bay, the most flourishing community being in the midbay region where the salinity averages between 20 to 21 parts per thousand (Amos, 1957). It is the most common annelid in Chesapeake Bay. It is the commonest and most widely distributed nereid in the vicinity of Beaufort, North Carolina. It is very abundant in many intertidal areas in the Gulf of Mexico. It no doubt serves as an important food item to bottom- feeding animals such as crabs and skates. The swarming sexually mature adults may be found in immense numbers, in the daytime and evening, when they are attracted to the light. They have been reported swarming in Miramichi Bay, New Brunswick, in June (Berkeley and Berkeley, 1953) ; they were swarming in such large numbers that a fisheries patrol boat at first mistook the swarm for a sand bar; the siu-face of the sea over a wide area was in a state of violent turmoil. In the Woods Hole region and Vineyard Sound, they have been observed swarming in March, May, June, July, August, September, fii-st of October (Bumpus, 1898a-c; Wilson, 1892). They were seen in large numbers in Rhode Island in May (Mead, POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 169 1900). They have been observed swimming in incredible numbers in Long Island Soimd in August (Verrill and Smith, 1874), when they were eagerly pursued by the bluefish. They have been observed breeding in September in Beaufort, North CaroHna (Wilson, 1900; Andrews, 1891a). They appeared in large swarms swimming in the Cooper River, South Carolina, opposite the Navy Yard, April 23, 1925 (reported by Commander A. K. Atkins, specimens in USNM). The swarming behavior has been followed by Lillie and Just (1913) and others in the Woods Hole area. They were taken after sunset on certain nights, in general, during the "dark of the moon" during June to September. They appear swimming near the surface of the water very soon after sunset and may be attracted by a light. The swarming usually begins with the appearance of a few males, distinguished by their bright red anterior segments and white sexual posterior segments, darting rapidly through the water in curved paths. The much larger females, paler in color, often nearly white, then begin to appear, usually in smaller numbers, swimming slowly through the water. They increase in number for a time, then decrease and finally disappear after a couple of hours. The female is surrounded by several males, which swim rapidly in narrow circles about her. The males begin to shed sperm and soon the female begins to shed her eggs, then slowly sinks into the water to die. Some kind of emanation from the mature egg-filled females incites the males to shed sperm. For the female, the presence of sperm in the sea water incites the shedding of eggs. The early development has been followed by Banse (1954, in Kiel Bay in western Baltic); the adults swarm in July; the eggs are about 140ju in diameter; they develop rapidly into planktotrophic larvae and change to bottom forms when they have 4-6 segments, playing no further role in the plankton; occasionally they may remain in the plankton until they are 1.4 mm. long. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Numerous specimens from Gulf of St. Lawrence (Prince Edward Island), Nova Scotia (Cape Breton Island), Newfoundland, Maine (Days Cove, Damariscotta River), New Hampshire (mouth of Squamscott River, Great Bay, mouth and middle of Oyster River, Belamy River), Massachusetts (Buzzards Bay; New Bedford; North and South Ponds, Megansett Estuary; Elizabeth Islands; Cape Cod, Sandwich, Wellfleet, FoUins Pond, head of Bass River, West Yarmouth, Cotuit; Martha's Vineyard, Lagoon Pond, Senekontacket Pond), Connecticut (New Haven), Rhode Island, New Jersey (Long Island Sound), Delaware (Assonoman Bay), Maryland (Chesapeake and Chincoteague Bays; Ocean City), Virginia (Cape Charles, Norfolk), North Carolina (Beaufort), South Carolina (Cooper River, opposite the Navy Yard), Florida (Apalachicola Bay), 170 U.S. NATIONAL JVIUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Mississippi, Louisiana (St. Bernard Parish, Dutchman Gap; St. Bernardo Pass; Half-Moon Island; Drum Bay), Uruguay. DISTRIBUTION.?Gulf of St. Lawrence to Florida, Gulf of Mexico (Florida to Mexico), West Indies (Puerto Rico, in mangroves), Central America (both sides Panama), South America (El Salvador, Venezuela, Uruguay), central California (San Francisco Bay and its estuaries; brackish water of Lake Merritt), Denmark, North Sea, English Channel, western Baltic to south coast of Spain, Mediter- ranean, Adriatic, West and South Africa. In high intertidal to 25 fathoms; sexual epitokes at surface. Nereis (Neanthes) virens Sara, 1835 FIGURE 44/ Nereis virens Turnbull, 1876, p. 265, pis. 42-44.?Webster, 1879, p. 236.?Verrill, 1881, pp. 290, 296, 297, 300, 304, 308.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 717; 1887, p. 724.?Bumpus, 1898a, p. 485.?Hamaker, 1898, p. 89, pis. 1-5.? Gray, 1900, p. 308.?Whiteaves, 1901, p. 81.?Sumner, Oaburn, and Cole, 1913, p. 620.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 348, fig. 134,?-*;.?Copeland and Wieman, 1924, p. 231.?Prefontaine, 1932, p. 207.?Procter, 1933, p. 139.?Miner, 1950, p. 317, pi. 103, pi. VII, 2, viii, 3.?Pratt, 1951, p. 330.?Wesenberg- Lund, 1951, p. 42; 1958, p. 27.?Gustafson, 1953, p. 3.?NicoU, 1954, p. 69, figs. 1-3.?Berkeley and Berkeley, 1954, p. 458.?Newell, 1954, p. 334.? MacPhail, 1954, p. 11, figs, 1-2.?Dow and Wallace, 1955, p. 1.?Petti bone, 1956a. p. 556.?J0rgensen and Dales, 1957, p. 357.?Stickney, 1959, pp. 14, 15.?Clark, 1960, p. 19. Nereis (Neanthes) paucidentala Treadwell, 1939b, p. 6, fig. 25 (type from Charles- town, Massachusetts, examined, courtesy American Museum Natural History).?Not Moore, 1903a. Nereis (Neanthes) varia Treadwell, 1941, p. 3 (new name for JV. paucidentala, preoccupied). Nereis southerni Abdel-Moez and Humphries, 1955, p. 147, figs. 1-6.?Rasmussen, 1956, p. 69. Nereis riisei Hartman, 1956, p. 279 (part; includes N. varia Treadwell from Charlestown, Mass.).?Not Grube, 1856. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 900 mm., width up to 43 mm., seg- ments up to 200 or more. Body thick anteriorly, somewhat flattened posteriorly, integument wrinkled. Tentacular cirri slender, tapering, the longest extending to setigers 3-9. Parapodia vary only slightly from anterior to posterior end (fig. 44/). Notopodium with 3 ligules, upper one largest, widest basally, tapering gradually to bluntly conical tip (largest in middle of body, decreasing slightly anteriorly and posteriorly); lower one shorter, conical; middle or presetal one still shorter, rounded (shorter and curved ventrally in middle and posterior segments). Setigerous lobe of neuropodium with a short rounded presetal lip and a longer iingerlike postsetal lip or ligule, with a lower conical ligule. Dorsal and ventral cirri shorter than the ligules. Acicula black. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 171 Notosetae consist of homogomph spinigers. Upper bundle of ne.urosetae consist of homogomph spinigers and hefcerogomph falcigers with long blades; lower bundle of neurosetae consist of heterogomph spinigers and falcigers with long blades. Neuropodial heterogomph falcigers usually absent in the middle and posterior segments (may be present throughout in young specimens). Proboscis with black to dark amber-colored jaws, each with 5-10 teeth. Paragnaths variable in color, number, size and arrangement; they may be black to light amber colored, rarely represented by papillae only on some areas. There may be several small paragnaths instead of a single large one. They may be conical, pointed to low, flat. Area i with 0-7 denticles; area ii, arched groups (1-8); area iii, irregular transverse group of 2-3 irregular rows (4-14); area iv, arched groups (5-27); area v, 0?i; area vi, 0-5; areas vir-viii, irregular transverse band of 2-3 irregular rows. Color, in life: iridescent g?rcenish to bluish, with or without golden yellow or red spots scattered along middorsal line and on parapodia, some with whitish spots; greenish brown with scattered opaque whitish spots, more concentrated along prostomium and middorsal line; dark brown, cupreous. The mature sexual forms develop into a slightly modified hetero- nereis. The eyes become slightly larger and more bulging. The first 7 pairs of dorsal cirri become cylindrical with curved tips (on males only?), the first 5 pairs of ventral cirri become slightly modified. The anal segment becomes crenulate. The body is not sharply set off into regions although the segments are more compressed in pos- terior two-thirds of body, and the parapodia are provided with a modified type of swimming setae in addition to the normal type of setae, i.e., they do not replace the normal type of setae, as in a well developed type of heteronereis. The swimming setae have a flattened blade, tapering abruptly to a short pointed tip. In the larger form swarming at the surface (270 mm. long, 25 mm. wide, 148 segments, Cape Cod Canal, Massachusetts, May 2 and 17, 1954), the parapodial lobes, especially the large upper dorsal ligules, start enlarging around segment 22, gradually enlarge to the middle of the body, then decrease gradually in size; the paragnaths on the proboscis were degenerate, mostly just amber-colored spots indicating the areas of the paragnaths. BIOLOGY.?Nereis virens, commonly known as "clam worm" or "sandwormi," is found in the sheltered shores of both sounds and estuaries, burrowing near the low water mark of the sandy and muddy shores and considerable distance farther up, where it ranges nearly to the top of the high water mark. It is especially common in flats bordering the mouths of rivers. It is found in all types of soils, in- cluding coarse and fine muddy sand, gravelly sand, in clay, peat, in 5 69-457?63 12 172 TJ-S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 water soaked wood. On rocky shores, it is found under rocks, stones, in the sand among mussel beds. It is found among the roots of de- caying marsh grass and eelgrass. It is rarely found in scrapings from floats, pile scrapings among tunicates, sponges, barnacles, etc. It was found at only 2 stations in connection with the oc?ano- graphie fouling studies in the New England region. It burrows at depths of from 7 to 45 cm., the largest specimens usually found at the greatest depths. It secretes a viscid fluid which binds the grains of sand together, forming a loose and flexible, irreg- ular burrow. The abundant mucuslike secretion gives smoothness and some coherency to the walls of the burrow, but it does not form a solid tube. It feeds with the anterior end protruding out of the burrow, crawling to the food, seizing it with its powerful jaws and jerking it down into its burrow. It may show circular searching movements of the anterior end, when it is stimulated by food juices. It comes out at times from the burrow, especially at night, to forage on the surface and swims about at the surface of the water. It is very active, swift, voracious and predatory, feeding on other worms and various kinds of marine animals; it also feeds on algae (Ulva). It has a keen sense of food detection (Copeland and Wieman, 1924) and will respond to most minute particles of ground clam meats. Chemical sense is the primary one upon which its responses to animal food de- pend, sight playing little part in the worms' food reactions. It can be induced to enter glass tubes of appropriate diameter, placed in sea water; the tubes are soon lined with mucus; it will behave essentially as it does in its natural burrows in the sand. There is a rhythmic undulatory movement of a variable portion of the body, taking place in a dorso ventral direction, these muscular waves produc- ing a current of water passing along the body from the anterior to the posterior end. The current of water in the burrow would bring in a constant supply of fresh water as well as be a factor in conveying food stimuli to the sense organs. It is capable of considerable migration. The worms have been ob- served moving along drainage channels with the incoming tide, along the surface of the flats for as much as 12 feet before reburrowing in the flats (Dow and Wallace, 1955). Young worms, up to 60 65 segments, were gathered at night, swimming at the surface (Eel Fond, Woods Hole, Massachusetts, June 27, 1954). The worms are dug out by the tautog, scup, and other fish and, being one of the largest and most abundant of polychaetes in the New England region, form an important item of food for many fish. They are used extensively as bait by line fishermen. Along with the blood worms, Olycera, they are of commercial importance for the United States salt-water sport fishery which extends from Connecticut to POLTCHAETB WORMS, PART 1 173 Maryland, with greatest concentration in waters about Long Island. Maine has been the heavy producer for the past 20 or more years; since 1949, they have been dug commercially in Canada. In the years 1946 to 1954 in Maine, on the average 123,308 pounds, with a yearly value of $76,986.00 were marketed (Dow and Wallace, 1955). To be of commercial importance, the worms have to be at least 20 cm. long (about 8 inches). They are collected in wooden boxes and shipped b}"^ air express in a moist fibrous type of seaweed which is found in the salt marshes of Nova Scotia {Ascophyllum machaii and A. nodosum). It is generally believed that they reach minimum marketable size sometime after their first year, and that the larger worms taken in the commercial fishery are probably in their third year. They are thought to carry out their spawning effort toward the end of their third year. After spawning, all or nearly all of the spent spawners die. During the reproductive season, the sexually mature adults leave their burrows and swim at the surface; they have been observed swim- ming in shallow waters along the shores, in tide pools, sometimes swarming in immense numbers both in the daytime and evening; some- times scores of spent males are observed. They emerge from the mud or gravel as the tide rises, then disappear again. In Maine they have been observed swarming in the middle of March to late in June, some- times extending into August (Gustafson, 1953). In New Hampshire at Emerson Beach, mouth of Oyster River, swarming of spent males were observed in April (April 11, 1955, E. Swau; up to 160 mm. long, 13 mm. wide, 135 segments). In Massachusetts, the height of the breeding season appears to be in March (Bumpus, 1898a; Gray, 1900). Some sexually mature slightly modified heteronereids were found swimming in tide pools at Scituate in April (April 2, 1957, J. E. Hanks). The swarming of smaller worms (about 180 mm. long, 11 mm. wide) was observed by Mr. Milton Gray at Barnstable from the end of February to the first of April, the worms swimming close to the flats at half tide to low tide; Mr. Gray also observed larger ones (up to 270 mm. long, 25 mm. wide) along the Cape Cod Canal in May (May 2 and 16, 1954; May 5-8 and 19-22, 1955; May 8-10 and 23-26, 1956), the worms swimming at the surface in the evening shortly before or after the change of tide during the new moon and full moon. In Rhode Island they liave been observed in March and April (Bumpus, 1898a, VerriU and Smith, 1874) ; some sexually mature adults were found at Sakonnet Point, swimming about in tide pools (March 16, 1957, J. E. Hanks). At Whitstable, England, they spawn during spring tides in the middle of April, when swarms of adults become pelagic (Newell, 1954). 174 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 The worm has considerable powers of dispersal as indicated by its daylight crawling on exposed intertidal arcas, its nocturnal swimming, and the swarming and spawning during the reproductive period. It swims actively and is carried by winds, tides, and currents, and dis- persed over wide areas. It can withstand considerable changes in salinity from strictly marine to estuarine conditions. It has been collected high intertidally and dredged down to 84 fathoms. MATERIAL EXAMINED,?Numerous specimens Gulf of St. Lawrence (Bay of Chaleurs, St. Lawrence estuary, Anticosti Island), Nova Scotia (Bay of Fundy), Newfoundland, New Brunswick (Harvey in Salisbury Bay, St. Andrews, Grand Manan), Maine (St. Croix K.iver, Machias Bay, Penobscot Bay, Boothbay Harbor region, Casco Bay, Sea Point near Kittery), New Hampshire (Oyster River, Belamy River, Little Harbor, Sagamore Creek, Rye Harbor, Hampton Har- bor), Massachusetts (Plum Island, Essex, Marbleliead, Scituate, Annisquam River, Cape Ann, Woods Hole region, Alegansett estuary, Elizabeth Islands, Martha's Vineyard, Cape Cod), Rhode Island (Narragansett Bay, Green Pond, Potters Pond, Sakonnet Point). DiSTEiBUTiON.?Iceland, Norway, Ireland, North Sea to France, Gulf of St. Lav^rence, Newfoundland to Virginia. Low water to 84 fathoms; sexual forms at surface. Nereis {Hediste) diversicolor O. F. MiiUcr, 1776 FiG?HE 44,y,A Nereis diversicolor ? Hoagland, 1919, p. 574.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 344, fig. 133,n-/.? Dehorne, 1925, p. 1141?Herpin, 1926, pp. 18, 28, 88, 94, 118.?Thorson, 1946, p. 65, fig. 30.?Harley, 1950, p. 734.?Dales, 1950, p. 321; 1951, p. 131.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1950a, p. 56; 1950b, p. 42; 1951, p. 41; 1958, p. 26.? Smidt, 1951, p. 48, figs. 17, 18.?Wells and Dales, 1951, p. 674.?Newell, 1954, p. 334.?Dales and Kennedy, 1954, p. 699.?Boguclii, 1954, p. 79.? Smith, 1955a, p. 33; 1955b, p. 326; 1955c, p. 453; 1956, p. 81; 1958, p. 60.? Berkeley and Berkeley, 1956b, p. 267, fig. 3.?J0rgensen and Dales, 1957, p. 357.?Stickney, 1959, pp. 17, 18.?Clark, 1960, p. 19. Neanthes diversicolor Hartman, 1960a, p. 35 (part). DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 200 mm., width up to 10 mm., seg- ments up to 120. Body thickened, turgid anteriorly, flattened pos- teriorly. Tentacular cirri slender, tapering, longest extending to setigers 5-7. Parapodia differ only sHghtly from anterior to posterior end. In the anterior segments (fig. 44(/), parapodia with 3 notopodial ligules, upper one larger, triangular; lower one shorter, conical; middle or presetal one still shorter, conical. Setigerous lobe of neuropodia with two thick lips, postsetal lip or ligule slightly longer, conical; presetal lip short, bluntly rounded, with a conical lower ligule. No- tosetae homogomph spinigers. Upper group of neurosetae homo- gomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers with rather long blades; POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 175 lower group of neurosetae heterogomph spinigers and falcigers. Parapodia from middle of body with lips of neuropodial setigerous lobe subequal in length, not extending beyond the aciculum. In the posterior parapodia, the middle or presetal no topo dial ligule is small or absent. The setae are similar to the more anterior seg- ments except that in the upper group of neurosetae, there are homo- gomph spinigers and few (1-3) heavy, specialized falcigers with end- pieces completely or partially fused to the shafts (fig. 44A). Acicula dark to black. Dorsal and ventral cirri shorter than the ligules. Proboscis with brown amber-colored jaws, each with 5-8 teeth; with amber-colored paragnaths: Area i with 0-9 denticles; areas ii and rv, arched groups; area iii, transverse mass of 2-3 irregular rows; area V, 0; area vi, 1-9; areas vii-viii, wide scattered band of 1-2 irregular rows. Color, in life: very variable, as indicated by its specific name, greenish, yellowish, yellowish green, orange red, reddish brown, with 2 darker longitudinal bands; may have yellowish pigment on prosto- mium; colorless preserved, except for 2 faint to distinct longitudinal bands in the anterior region. Dales and Kennedy (1954) found that the variable color is due to variations in the proportion of green, orange, and brown pigments and that the green pigment is due to biliverdin in minute granules in the epithelial cells under the cuticle, mainly along the borders of the blood capillaries, formed by the breakdown of hemoglobin of the blood. The yellow, brown, and orange pigments were mainly carotenoids. They found that the entirely green form consisted of ripe males (bright grass green), ripe females (darker green), and spawned females. As the worms mature, the tissues undergo phagocytosis, the muscles of the body wall are eroded away, and the amount of hemoglobin diminishes; the biliverdin is derived from the hemoglobin. The females are more variable in color?green with orange or brown pigments. When they spawn, they lose the orange and brown pigments and become uniformly green. Heteronereis stage is lacking. They may be found filled with rather large yolky eggs. BIOLOGY.?Nereis diversicolor is almost entirely restricted to the littoral zone. It is one of the commonest of all shore polychaetes in the British Isles and northwestern Europe. It is highly euryhaline, easily adapting itself to salt water in the littoral region, to bracldsh water, and to salt swamps of varying salinit?s. In the coastal areas, it is especially common where there is a large admixture of fresh water. Smith (1955a-c, 1956) found that when in an essentially "marine-dominated" environment, N. diversicolor finds its optimum in local, relatively brackish zones; that the bracldsh inter tidal water 176 U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETTfi 227 is a characteristic and relatively stable feature; and that it is found in the least saline part of the available habitat. In estuaries where the worms are subject to wide salinity variations semidiurnally, semimonthly and seasonally, it may withstand ranges of salinities from over 257oo or more down to salinities below l7oo- In British estuaries, it penetrates farther into waters of low salinity than any other "marine" type and may penetrate into nearly fresh waters. In stable waters of low salinity, as in the practically tideless Baltic Sea, it is found subtidally in shallow waters and encounters over much of the year a low but relatively stable salinity; here it appears to be limited to a salinity as high as 47oo- Smith (1955c) made a comparative study of N. diversicolor from representative parts of its geographical range, under 4 different types of salinity: (1) That of relatively stable high salinity of marine- dominated population in Scotland and southern England; (2) rela- tively stable low salinity of Baltic population in Gulf of Finland; (3) varying salinities or estuarine conditions in southern England; and (4) intermediate saHnities in Denmark. He carried out ecological and physiological studies in several localities in respect to salinity tolerance and found that JV. diversicolor shows a uniform pattern of constant level of coelomic chloride regulation relative to salinity of the medium regardless of the salinity of its regional background and that there are no physiological races in respect to salinity tolerance. N. diversicolor behaves as a typical adjuster in higher salinities but as a regulator in lower salinities. Having long survived under conditions of practically complete oxygen lack, it has great powers of osmoregu- lation; it also has a wide temperature tolerance. It is found on bottoms of mud, clay, coarse and fine muddy sand, fine gravelly sand, peat, among the roots of marsh grass. It is found in coarse sand of exposed beaches as well as in fine firm mud of pro- tected shores. It forms fairly permanent burrows, which may be a simple vertical U-shaped gallery or complicated by the presence of ad- ditional branches with openings to the surface. According to Smidt (1951) and others, although it tolerates very different conditions of life, it seems to show a certain preference for the upper part of the tidal zone and for a soft bottom ; it thrives best where the bottom is sheltered against too heavy movements of the water. It feeds on algal frag- ments, dead crustaceans or molluscs, etc., and swallows the surface mud around the openings of the burrow. According to Boguchi (1954), it is an omnivorous animal, eating algae, mud, and vegetable and animal detritus; cannibalism was frequently observed. The worms pull out of their burrows and brouse on the surface of the mud. Herpin (1926) found that it feeds on Entero- morpha, Porphyra, diatoms, Zostera, and, at certain seasons when the POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 177 marine algae is not available, on debris and terrestrial vegetation brought down to the sea; at certain seasons, it may be carnivorous, feeding on other annelids. On breaking the clods of mud, one may find that the walls of the galleries are filled with fragments of Entero- morpha or Zostera; the animal drags fragments of the algae into the galleries for feeding later. Harley (1950) found that it is able to use a filter-feeding mechanism, at least when occupying glass tubes in the laboratory. A filter-feeding funnel, attached in front to the wall of the tube, was made from long threads secreted by the parapodial glands and molded into the shape of a funnel by the parapodial setae. With the undulation of the seg- ments of the body, water with the suspended particles was drawn past the animal anteroposteriorly; particles were sieved out of the water current. At intervals, the worm moved forward and swallowed the feeding funnel with its entrapped particles. Dales (1950, 1951), in a study of a population in the Thames estuary in England, and others have found that the sexual adults are atokous (the reports that they may be epitokous are probably due to confusion of species; the closely related N. jap?nica Izuka in Japan swarms at the surface, without, however, going through the marked structural changes of the typical heteronereid; it is only slightly modified, Smith, 1968) and dioecious (some consider that hermaphroditism might occur exceptionally; the closely related A^. limnicola Johnson, which includes N. lighii Hartman, from California estuaries and fresh water lakes, is a protandrous, self-fertilizing viviparous hermaphrodite, Smith, 1950, 1958). The males are fewer in number than the females (only 10 percent males found by Dales; 40 percent males found by Boguchi, 1954). Under natural conditions both Dehorne (1925) and Dales (1950) have described a kind of pseudocopulation or sexual con- gress in which several females were found around a single male, associ- ated perhaps with the scarcity of males. Herpin (1926) found 1 male to 7 females. In this case, the usual procedure is reversed and the numerous females pursue the scarce males. They may leave their burrows at night and swim in search of males. Spawning takes place in the burrow. Dales observed that spawning took place toward the end of February when there was a marked rise in temperature between 5? and 8.8? C. Spawning occurs mostly in late winter or early spring but may occur exceptionally throughout the year in parts of its range. The eggs are evidently shed by rupture of the body wall. The sperm are discharged through the nephridia or by rupture of the body wall. Females die after spawning. Owing to the comparative scarcity of males and the fact that the females will not spawn except in the presence of a male, large numbers of mature fe- males remain unspawned. They eventually die before the following 178 U.B. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 22 7 spawning season but may attain a relatively large size before doing so; thus they may attain a length of 200 mm. The length of life does not normally exceed 18 months and includes only 1 breeding season. The early development has been followed by Dales (1950). The eggs are lecithotrophic. The larvae develop in the mud and there is no true pelagic phase, although young individuals may be whirled up in the water and thus be found in the plankton. They developed into ciliated monotrochophores, then into free-swimming larvae with limited swimming powers. By 7 weeks they were 1.6 mm. long, with 10 setigerous segments, and feeding began. During the first 8 weeks, the larvae developed in the parent burrow and by 10 weeks were 4 mm. long, with 20 setigers, and pigmented. They were minia- ture adults, burrowing in the mud and constructing minute U-shaped tubes. The worms grew rapidly and steadily increased in length during the first summer after hatching, increasing 10-20 mm. in length each month; young worms hatched in February reached a length of 100 mm. by October. During the winter months, there was little or no increase in length. The germ cells grew rapidly during this period. By October in the female, the coelom contained small oocytes; the coelom became filled with a loose parenchyma tissue which appeared to be responsible for the growth and deposition of yolk in the oocytes. The loose parenchjmia disappeared and mature oocytes came to fill most of the coelom. In the male, the loose parenchyma soon dis- appeared; "sperm-plates" formed and acquired tails; free sperm were found in the coelom for two weeks before spawning. In both sexes, histolysis of the muscle layers of the body wall took place and it became very thin by the time spawning was ready to take place. Boguchi (1954) cultivated N. diversicolor in the laboratory aquar- ium (temperature 15? to 20? C). They reached sexual maturity and reproduced in the spring breeding season; young animals 6 months old reached the length of the adult animal (about 100 mm.). MATERIAL EXAMiNED.^-Numerous specimens from Gulf of St. Lawrence (Bay of Haha, Saguenay River, St. Lawrence estuary, Cascapedia River, Port Daniel, New Richmond, Bay of Chaleurs), Nova Scotia (shore opposite Five Islands, east side Cape George, Delap Cove, Kingsport), New Brunswick (New Horton), Maine (Starboard Creek in Machias; Drummore Bay at Phippsburg; Rob- binston on St. Croix River; Boothbay Harbor region, Sheepscot and Cod Cove, Sheepscot River, off Merrill Ledge, North Edgecomb, Fort Popham; gut between Sawyer and Barter Islands, cove south shore Sawyer Island, Sagadahoc Bay and Riggs Cove, Georgetown Island, Medomak; Bradstreet Cove off Poorliouse Cove, John's River), New Hampshire (Oyster River just below dam in stream bed; Beard's Creek emptying into Oyster River near Durham, Emerson's PART 1 179 Beach, mouth of Oyster River, mud by Bellamy River; Hilton Park, Dover Point, Wentworth, north shore Little Harbor; Fort Stark, Newcastle; Hampton Harbor near entrance to Blackwater River), Massachusetts (Beverly Harbor, M. Gray; Annisquam River, Cape Ann, R.W. Dexter). DISTRIBUTION.?Greenland, Iceland, Norway to English Channel, North Sea, Baltic, Mediterranean, Adriatic, Gulf of St. Lawrence to Massachusetts (Cape Ann), Puerto Rico(?). High intertidal to 22 fathoms. Nereis (^Nereis) pel?gica Linn?, 1758 FIGURE 42,d-? Nereis pel?gica Verrill, 1881, pp. 288, 290, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 301, 308, 311, 315, 316, 324.?Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 718; 1887, p. 724.?Whit- eaves, 1901, p. 80.?Sumner, Osbiirn, and Cole, 1913, p. 619.?Fauvel, 1923, p. 336.?Herpin, 1926, pp. 15, 18, 29, 43, 59.?Wilson, 1932, p. 203, figs H3.?Procter, 1933, p. 139.?Thorson, 1946, p. 64, fig. 29.?Miner, 1950 p. 318, pi. 103.?Pratt, 1951, p. 330.?Grainger, 1954, p. 514.?Pettibone 1954, p. 264, fig. 30,a-fc; 1956a, p. 557; 1956b, p. 290.?Uachakov, 1955, p 211, fig. 66.?Rasmussen, 1956, p. 53, figs. 17-18.?Jfirgensen and Dales, 1957, p. 358.?Wesenberg-Lund, 1958, p. 26; 1962, p. 76.?Rioja, 1958, p 253,?Clark, 1959, p. 85; 1960, p. 19.?Fauvel and Ruliier, 1959, p. 572. DESCRIPTION.-?Length up to 155 mm., width up to 14 mm., seg- ments up to 100. Body slender, trim, with integument smooth, not wrinkled. Tentacular cirri rather short, subequal, longest may reach setiger 2, with a tendency to be somewhat articulated distally. Para- podial lobes (fig. 42??) similar throughout the body. Notopodium with 2 subequal, short, thick, bluntly rounded hgules (subconical in posterior region and in young specimens), between which is an incon- spicuous setigerous lobe. Neuropodiuni with bluntly conical setiger- ous lobe and a lower ligule which is similar to the notopodial ligules. Dorsal and ventral cirri longer than the ligules. In the anterior region, notosetae homogomph spinigers (fig. 42?), Upper group of neurosetae homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers; lower group of neurosetae heterogomph spinigers (fig. 42/) and falcigers with short blades (fig. 42g). In the middle and pos- terior regions, notosetae consist of few (4 or so) homogomph falcigers with reduced blunt blades (fig. 42A,; begin on about setiger 40). Neuro- setae similar to the anterior region except some of the falcigers may lose their blades and give the appearance of simple setae. Acicula black. Proboscis with black jaws, each with 5?7 teeth; with paragnaths: area i with 1-3 denticles; areas ii and iv, arched groups of 2-3 rows; area iii, small transverse groups of 2-3 rows; area v, 0 (rarely 1-3) ; area vi, usually 4 larger ones in square or cross (2-8); areas vii-viii, 1-2 irregular rows of quite large parag- 180 U-S. NATIO?TAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 naths, followed by several rows of smaller ones which diminish in size posteriorly. Color, in life: iridescent greenish brown, rich golden brown, reddish brown, light brown, olive green, yellowish, violet; color, preserved: uniformly purplish, reddish, some with dorsal cirri and ligules dark distally. At maturity, sexually dimorphic heteronereids are formed. The eyes are greatly enlarged. The body is divided into 2 regions, anterior region with the usual type of setae and posterior region with the usual type of setae replaced by swimming setae, segments compressed and flattened anteroposteriorly, with extra development of lamellar plates on neuropodia and bases of dorsal and ventral cirri. Table 3 below shows how the sexually dimorphic males and females differ. TABLE 3.?Differences between sexually dimorphic males and females in N. (Nereis) pel?gica Character Male haeroner?ld Female Aeteronereii Dorsal cirri of First 7 pairs enlarged. First 5 pairs slightly anterior region cylindrical, with curved tip modified Ventral cirri of First 5-6 pairs modified, First 4 pairs slightly anterior region clubbed modified Number of setigers 16 15-19 in anterior region Dorsal oini of pos- Crenulate on lower Smooth, not crenulate terior modified margin region Pygidium or anal Papillate or crenulate Smooth, not papillate segment BIOLOGY.?Found intertidally on rocky shores, under rocks, in crevices, among mussels {Mytilus) and sponges (as Halichondria), on algae, including holdfasts of Laminaria, under incrusting algae (as Lithothamnion) on rocks. Confined mostly to the lower half of the intertidal zone. Found on pilings, floats, among tunicates, sponges, hydroids, etc. May form membranous tubes attached to algae. Found on floating kelp and sometimes washed upon the beach after storms along with the kelp (as Laminar?a, Fucus). Very numer- ous in the oc?anographie fouling studies in the New England region. Dredged on bottoms of sand, gravel, stones, rocks, rarely in mud, among shells, bark, algae (including "weed" from Lagoon Pond), sponge masses, bryozoan nodules, compoimd tunicates (as sandy Amaroedwm -pelluddum), corals, and worm tubes. The species is POLTCHAETB WORMS, PAKT 1 181 characteristically found in clean, fresh, circulating water. Taken from the Atlantic cod Gadus callanas (Grainger, 1954) and from the stomach of haddock (Georges Bank, 1953, 1954, R. Wigley). Four male heteronereids were taken from the stomach of herring in the Gulf of St. La\vrence. Sexual epitokes appear sporadically at varying times of the year and may appear in surface waters. They have been reported in December to January in the English Channel, April to May and October near Iceland, in August in Norway (Wilson, 1932; Thorson, 1946), in April in Denmark (Rasmussen, 1956), in July and August in Canadian Arctic (Grainger, 1954). They were found in Labrador in August (60 fathoms). Woods Hole, Massachusetts in March (surface), Cape Cod Canal in May (surface), and vicinity of Eastport and Penobscot Bay and Mount Desert region in October (1 to 30 feet). Wilson (1932) followed its early development and found it to have pelagic larvae. MATERIAL EXAMINED. ? Numerous specimens from Labrador, Gulf of St. Lawrence, off Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, New Bruns- wick, Maine (vicinity Eastport, Mount Desert region, Penobscot Bay, Rockland, Muscongus Bay, Boothbay Harbor region, Sea Point near Kittery, Cape Neddick, York), New Hampshire (Isles of Shoals, Fort Stark, Newcastle, Rye Harbor, Hampton Harbor), Massachusetts (Georges Bank, Beverley, Cape Ann, Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, EUzabeth Islands, Vineyard Sound, Buzzards Bay, Nan tucket), Rhode Island (Narragansett approaches), Con- necticut, Long Island Sound, in low water to 250 fathoms; sexual forms at surface. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Norway to Mediterranean, Azores, West Africa, Hudson Bay to Long Island Sound, Florida (Key Largo), Bering Sea to Panama, Mexico, north Japan Sea to Japan, South Atlantic (Tristan da Cunha, Kerguelen, Magellan Straits). In low water to 609 fathoms; sexual heteronereids at surface. Nereis zonata Malmgren, 1867 FiGUEB 42c ? Nereis tenuis Webster and Benedict, 1884, p. 718, pi. 3, fig. 37, pi. 4, figs. 38-43.? Miner, 1950, p. 318, pi. 104. N&reis zonata Fauvel, 1923, p. 338, fig. \.ZO,g-n (part).?Pettibone, 1954, p. 265, fig. iO,e,h-i; 195Ca, p. 557.?Uschakov, 1955, p. 212, fig. 66.?Eliafion, 1962, p.250. DESCRIPTION.?Length up to 125 mm,, width up to 7 mm., segments up to 100 or more. Body slender, cylindrical, with integument smooth, not wrinkled. Tentacular cirri rather short, subequal, longest may reach setiger 2. Parapodia (fig. 42c) simuar throughout the length 182 ?.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 of the body. Notopodium with 2 subequal, triangular to conical lig- ules, gradually tapering to a broad tip. Neuropodium with conical setigerous lobe and a lower ligule similar to thenotopodial ligules. Dor- sal cirri longer than the ligules; ventral cirri equal to or slightly shorter than the ligules. In the anterior region, notosetae consist of homogomph spinigers. Upper group of neurosetae, homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers; lower group of neurosetae, heterogomph spinigers and fal- cigers with rather short blades. In the middle and posterior regions, notosetae consist of few (1-3 or so) homogomph falcigers with short, blunt oval blades (begin on about setiger 30). Neurosetae similar to anterior region except some of the heterogomph falcigers may lose their blades and give the appearance of simple setae. Acicula black. Proboscis with falcate jaws, each with 6-7 teeth; with paragnaths: area i with 0-1 denticles; areas ii and iv, arched masses of 2-3 rows; area iir, small transverse group of 2-3 rows; area v, 0 (rarely 1); area vi, oval mass (6-10 or more); areas vir-viii, a row of quite large paragnaths (7-9) anterior to a wide band of small subequal ones. Color: faint to dark wide transverse bands of reddish, rusty brown, violet, purple red (anterior foiu-th of segment without color) ; or with- out color on smaller specimens. At maturity, sexually dimorphic heteronereids are formed. The eyes are greatly enlarged. The body is divided into two regions, an anterior region with the usual type of setae, and a posterior region with the usual type of setae replaced by swimming setae, with segments compressed and flattened anteroposteriorly, with extra development of lamellar plates on neuropodia and bases of dorsal and ventral cirri. Table 4 below shows how the sexually dimorphic males and females differ. TABLE 4,?Differences between sexually dimorphic males and females oj N. zonata Character) Male hetero?ier?d Female heteronereid Dorsal cirri of anterior First 7-8 pairs clubbed First 7 pairs slightly region or not modified Ventral cirri of anterior First 5-7 pairs clubbed Not modified? region Number of setigers in 14-17 16-17 anterior region Dorsal cirri of pos- Crenulate on lower Smooth, not crenulate terior modified re- margin gion POLYCHABTE WOKMS, PAHT 1 183 BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of shells, sand, and gravel. Ap- pears to be a cold water Arctic form. Sexual epitokes appear sporad- ically. MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Few small specimens from Massachusetts (Cape Cod Bay near Cape Cod Canal and off Provincetown, off Mar- tha's Vineyard), in 10-75 fathoms. DISTRIBUTION.?Widely distributed in the Arctic. Also Iceland, Faroes, Denmark, Hudson Bay to Massachusetts (Cape Cod), Bering Sea to Oregon, north Japan Sea. In low water to 439 fathoms; heteronereids at surface. Nereis (Nereis) grayi Pettibone, 1956b FiGUEE 42i Nereis (Nereis) grayi Pettibone, 1956b, p. 282, fig. 3. DESCRIPTION.?Body long, slender. Tentacular cirri long, tapering, the longest extend to se tiger 6. Parapodia similar throughout the length of the body. In the anterior region, notopodium with 2 sub- equal, elongated, conical, sharply pointed ligules. Neuropodium with bluntly conical setigerous lobe and lower, slightly shorter ligule. Notosetae consist of homogompb spinigers. Upper group of neuro- setae consist of homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers; lower group of neurosetae consist of heterogomph spinigers and falci- gers with rather long blades. In the middle and posterior regions, the setae are similar except that the notosetae consist of a few (1-2) homogomph falcigers with short, oval blades (begin on about setiger 27). Acicula dark. Dorsal and ventral cirri shorter than the ligules. Proboscis with brown amber-colored jaws; without paragnaths on areas i, iii, v, vii-viii; with paragnaths few and small on the other areas; area ii with 2-3 denticles; area iv, triangular group of 10-13; area vi with 3-4 denticles. Colorless preserved. Sexual epitokes unknown. BIOLOGY.?Found in mud, in elongate mud tubes of the maldanid Maldanopsis elongata (Verrill). Dredged in about 10 fathoms on bottoms of silty clay, fine sand (the maldanid was also common Buzzards Bay, H. Sanders), MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Few specimens from Massachusetts (Had- ley Harbor, Uncatena Island, M. Gray; Buzzards Bay, about 10 fathoms, H. Sanders). DISTRIBUTION.?Massachusetts (Woods Hole region). Low water to 10 fathoms. 184 tr.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 Family Paralacydoniidae, new family Type genus: Paralacydonia Fauvel, 1913. Paralacydonia Fauvel has been placed, along with Lacydonia Marion and Bobretzky, in the subfamily Lacydoniinae under the Phyllodocidae by Saint-Joseph (1888) and Fauvel (1914, 1923). Lacydonia seems to show a closer relationship to the Phyllodocidae and Alciopidae, while Paralacydonia seems more closely related to the Nephtyidae. While increasing the number of polychaete families is not particularly desirable, it has certain advantages over too much lumping. Not much is to be gained by annexing a genus to a larger family where it has few characters in common, since the major differ- ences of the aberrant genus are apt to be obscured in the larger, better known family. The following species have been described under Paralacydonia: the type species, P. paradoxa Fauvel (1913, 1914) from the Mediter- ranean; P. weberi Horst (1923) from the Netherlands Indies; P. mortenseni Augener (1924) from New Zealand and referred later to P. weberi by Augener (1927). The 2 species are dredged forms and are similar in most respects. Uschakov (1958b) considers them to be a single species. Body elongate, vermiform, subrectangular in cross section, having the general aspect of a nephtyid. Prostomium subconical, with 4 very small anterior antennae. Tentacular or buccal segment achae- tous and without appendages. First setigerous segment uniramous, rest biramous, supported by acicula. Parapodia with rami well separated, with long cilia along interramal border (as in Nephtyidae) ; each ramus with somewhat flattened presetal and postsetal lobes (correspond to lamellae of Nephtyidae). Dorsal cirri small, conical; ventral cirri digitiform (cirri not leaflike as in Phyllodocidae or Lacydoniidae). Notosetae simple. Neurosetae all compound (P. iveberi) or mostly compound with few lower simple setae (P. paradoxa; thus setae not all simple as in Nephtyidae). Proboscis muscular, cylindrical, unarmed. Contains only one genus. Genus Paralacydonia Fauvel, 1913 Type (monotypy) ; Paralacydonia paradoxa Fauvel, 1913. Con- tains only one New England species. Paralacydonia paradoxa Fauvel, 1913 FIGURE 46 Paralacydonia paradoxa Fauvel, 1913, p. 54, fig. 10; 1914, p. 118, pi. 7, figs. 1-9; 1923, p. 198, fig. 74,a-i; 1936b, p. 24.?Uschakov, 1958b, p. 416, fig. 1.? Uschakov and Wu, 1959, p. 8. ?Hartman, 1960b, p. 86, pi. 6. POLYCHAETB WOBMB, PART 1 185 DESCRIPTION.?^Length up to 20 mm., width up to 1.5 mm., seg- ments up to 70. Body elongated, slightly flattened, subrectangular in cross section. Prostomium (fig. 46,a,?) subconical, slightly flattened, without eyes, with 4 very small subequal anterior antennae (the antennae may be rather indistinct and easily overlooked). Buccal segment without appendages, ventrally forming lateral lips to the funnel-shaped "mouth. First setiger unLramous, with bilobed presetal lip and single conical postsetal lip, with single bundle of compound setae; dorsal cirri rudimentary; ventral cirri cylindrical; ventrally forms lower lip of mouth. Parapodia biramous, supported by acicula, with rami well separated, sim?iar along length of body, becoming thinner and more elongate pos- teriorly, with long cilia along the interramal parapodial border, forming FIGURE 46.?Paralacydonlldae, Paralacydonia paradoxa: a, dorsal view anterior end; b, same, vetitra! view; c, left middle parapodium, posterior view; d, notoseta; e, spinigerous heterogomph compound neuroseta;/, distal tip of stem of same, with blade broken off. 186 tJ.S, NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 22 7 a ciliated groove along the body. Middle parapodium (fig. 46c) with elongate notopodium with shorter rounded postsetal lip and unequally bilobed presetal lip, the upper part short, rounded and the lower part longer, papilliform, extending diagonally ventrally, with a fan-shaped bundle of slender notosetae. Notosetae (fig. 466?) simple, slender, finely spinous along slightly limbate border, tapering to fine tips. Dorsal cirri short, digitiform, emerging midway dorsally on notopodia. Neuropodia slightly longer than notopodia, shnilar in shape except upper part of presetal lip is larger, subtriangular. With a fan-shaped group of neurosetae, few lower ones simple, shorter, similar to noto- setae; rest of neurosetae (fig. 46,e,/) longer, compound spinigerous with stem heterogomph, spinous or frayed terminally, with blade long, tapering to capillary tips, finely spinous along one side. Ventral cirri cylindrical, extending distally to end of neuropodial lobe. Anal end without cirri (?). Colorless or with scattered brownish spots. BIOLOGY.?Dredged on bottoms of mud, mud with sand, gravel, and broken shells. MATEHIAL EXAMINED.?Off Massachusetts (Albatross Station 2242, 40?15' N., 70? 27' W., 58 fathoms, 1884; Station 2248, 40?07' N., 69?07' W., 67 fathoms, 1884). DISTRIBUTION.?Mediterranean, Atlantic off Morocco, off Massa- chusetts, Yellow Sea, off Southern California. In 27 to 1,030 fathoms. Family Nephtyidae (?Nephthydidae) Body elongated, linear, subtetragonal in cross section, with nu- merous short segments, tapered slightly anteriorly and more so posteriorly. Prostomium (fig. i9,a,c,d) small, somewhat flattened, angulate (subpentagonal, subrectangular, subquadrate). Four short, conical antennae present, an anterior pair at the anterior angles of the prostomium and a more posterior and slightly ventral pair (latter may be hidden as viewed dorsally; may be considered as ventral palps). A pair of nuchal organs at the posterolateral margins (inconspicuous ciliated sacs when inverted, appearing as a pair of papillae if everted). With or without eyes (often small, deeply buried, inconspicuous; according to Clark, 1956a, 1957, nearly all species of Nephtys possess a pair of eyes, each consisting of a pair of inverted single-celled photoreceptors which lie in pigment cups on the side of the brain; they are deeply embedded in the ganglion and, except in the small species, are not visible from the exterior; only the small species were able to orient themselves in a light beam). First or tentacular segment extending lateral and ventral to prostomium, with reduced notopodia and neuropodia with setae, with a pair of ventral tentacular cirri lateral to the neuropodia, similar to the antennae, with or without a pair of dorsal tentacular cirri. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 187 Ventral part of first five segments modified to permit passage of the large muscular proboscis, with muscular guiar membrane folded and tucked within the lateral lips of the mouth. Parapodia (fig. 51) biramous, with rami well separated, with acicular lobes flattened anteroposteriorly (supported by internal aciculiim which may have tip curved or covered by pigmented chitinous plate) and bearing fan-shaped preacicular and postacicular groups of setae, with or without anterior and posterior lamellae (flattened plates anterior and posterior to the setae), usually with a curved ciliated branchia (sometimes referred to as interramal cirrus) between the rami on a certain number of segments. Branchiae may be cirriform, siclde-shaped or foliaceous, involute (curved inward, fig. 48) or recurved (curved outward, fig. 51). Dorsal cirri (sometimes referred to as branchial cirri) on the lower sides of the notopodia; ventral cirri on the lower sides of the neuropodia; dorsal and ventral cirri short, conical or foUaceous. Setae simple, cross-channeled or camerated, serrated, ending in fine capillary tips; some may be bifurcated (lyrate). Pygidium with a single anal cirrus. Proboscis (fig. 496) eversible, cyhndrical, strongly muscular, bearing terminally soft papillae around the opening, usually ten pairs bifid papillae and two vertical lips, with a single middorsal and midventral papilla. Usually subterminal soft, conical papillae arranged in 14-22 longitudinal rows, with or without a longer middorsal or midventral papilla between the terminal and subterminal papillae. Basal part of proboscis smooth, ridged, or furnished with low tubercles or warts. A pair of horny hooked jaws within the proboscis, not visible unless dissected. All the species in the family bear a superficial resemblance, as- sociated no doubt with their hving in a more or less uniform habitat. They burrow in sand, mud, or ooze from high intertidal levels to great depths. They are prominent members of shallow water and shore fauna. They are predatory and extremely lively and move rapidly. They are able to burrow rapidly in moist sand, but do not form permanent burrows. They swim by a rapid undulatory movement in a horizontal plane (they are referred to as shimmy worms). They may lefive the substratum for spawning and other excursions and are active swimmers. In France, they are used as bait. They are sometimes called sand worms because of their frequent occurrence in sand. They are usually pearly or slate gray in life, with red middorsal blood vessel, red branchiae, red midventral streak (neural vessels lateral to ventral nerve cord; for details of blood vascular system of Nephtys, see Clark, 1956&). The parapodial cilia have been studied by Coonficld (1931, 1934). The cilia on the parapodia are grouped into small tufts, in a single 869-4B7?63 13 188 tr.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BULLETIN 227 row beginning on the outside of the base of the branchia, continuing around the tip of the branchia, and on the inner side and extending on the body wall between the rami to the base of the neuropodium. The effective beat of the cilia is from the head end toward the tail end. A current of water flows on each side of the worm posteriorly in the groove between the parapodial rami. The metachronal wave of cilia is at right angles to their effective beat. This wave passes from dorsal to ventral on the right side of the worm and from ventral to dorsal on the left side. The metachronal wave of cilia shows a rhythmic move- ment. The beating of the cilia on the branchiae and body wall produces a current which carries liquids and other materials posteriorly along the body. This ciliary movement is independent of the nervous system. In studies of the nervous system, Clark (1955, 1956c, 1957, 1958a-c) found that, in contrast to the relative uniformity of external morphology in the Nephtyidae, the nervous systems in the different species show many differences and may very well prove to be of im- portant diagnostic value. The early planktonic stages of Nephiys sp. in Rhode Island were followed in part by Fewkes (1883, p. 180, pi. 4). Key to the Known (Jcnera of Nephtyidae 1, Parapodial lobes with lamellae lacking or rudimentary (fig. 47,b,c). Micronephthys (p. 188) Parapodial lobes witli lamellae 2 2. Branchiae involute, curved or rolled in spiral inwardly toward lateral side of body (fig. i8,a,b,d) Ag?aophamus (p. 190) Branchiae recurved, cirriform or foliaceous, with convex side toward lateral side of body (fig. 51) Nephtys (p. 193) Genus Micronephthys Friedrich, 1939 Type (monotypy): Micronephthys minuta (Th?el, 1879). Contains only one New England species. Micronephthys minuta (Th?el, 1879) FIGURE 47,t>,c Nephthys minuta Th?el, 1879, p. 28, pi. 2, fig. 18.?Annenkova, 1937, p. 164; 1938, p. 162.?Gorbunov, 1946, p. 38.?Usehakov, 1?55, p. 217, fig. 68. Micronephthys minuta Friedrich, 1939, p. 123, figs. 3-4. DESOBIPTION.?Length up to 16 mm., width up to 3 mm., segments up to 30. Antennae subequal. Tentacular segment with prominent neuropodial conical setigerous lobes, with ventral tentacular cirri subequal to antennae. Notopodial setigerous lobes less prominent, without dorsal tentacular cirri. Parapodia (fig. 47,6,c)^ with rami widely separated, subequal, with rather sharply conical acicular lobes, without lamellae, with preacicular setae barred, longer than the rami. POLYCHAETE WORMS, PART 1 189 Postacicular setae long, smooth. Dorsal and ventral cirri small, conical. Branchiae (fig. 47c) begin on setigers 10-14 (setiger 10, ac- cording to Th?el; setigers 12-14 on specimens examined), few in number (?) (at least 8 pairs on specimens examined, none complete posteriorly, may be lacking according to Friedrich, 1939). Branchiae are cirriform and may be curled inward. BIOLOGY.?^A primitive type nephtjdd dredged on bottoms of sand, muddy sand, mud, and globigerina ooze. FIGURE 47.?Nephtyidae, a, Nephlys ?ongosetosa, parapodiiim from middle region, posterior view, tips of notosetae not shown, h-c, Micronephtkys minuta: b, parapodium from anterior region; c, parapodium from middle region, d, Nephtys paradoxa, parapodium from middle region, anterior view, e, Nephtys squamosa, dorsal view two parapodia from middle region. 190 U.S. NATIOISTAL H?USEUM BULLETIN 227 MATERIAL EXAMINED.?Few specimens from North Atlantic {Albatross Station 2084, 40? 16' N., 67? 05' W., 1,290 fathoms, 1883; Albatross Station 2103, 38? 47' N., 72? 37' W., 1,091 fathoms, 1883). DISTRIBUTION.?Scattered records in the Arctic: Siberian Arctic, Novaya Zemlya, Barents Sea; also north Japan Sea, North Atlantic (off Long Island Sound to off Chesapeake Bay). In 4 to 1,290 fathoms. Genus Aglaopfwmus Kinberg, 1866; emend. Hartman, 1949 Type (monotypy): Aglaofhamus lyratus Kinberg, 1866. Key to the New England Species of Ag?aophamus 1. Neuropodia with long digitate erect lobe or neuropodial cirrus on upper part (fig. ?Sd). Branchiae begin on setigers 5-8. Prostomiuin with 2 promi- nent eyes (fig. 48c). Tentacular segment with slender dorsal tentacular cirri (fig. 48c) A. verriili Neuropodia without long digitate lobe on upper part. Prostomium without eyes. Tentacular segment without dorsal tentacular cirri 2 2. Branchiae begin on setigers 10-16. Posterior parapodial lamellae short, not longer than the acicular lobes (fig. 486) A. lualmgreni Branchiae begin on setiger 2. Posterior parapodial lamellae foliaceous, longer than the acicular lobes (fig. 48o) A. circinata Aglaophamas verriili (Mclntosili, 1885) FIGURE 48,c,